Home

operation guide

1. Original Top Edge Top Top Edge Left When placing the original on the optional document processor Original Top Edge Top Top Edge Left Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen for sending 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Original Sending Data Format and then Original Orientation OPERATION GUIDE 5 11 Sending Functions g Ready to send Place original Destination Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document s top edge ran ell Top Edge Top Top Edge Left File Format A Cancel jel OK 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending Select the file format of the image to send The table below lists the file formats and their details File Format Adjustable range of image quality 1 Low Quality High Comp to 5 High Quality Low Comp 1 Low Quality High Comp to 5 High Quality Low Comp 4 Select original orientation from Top Edge Top and Top Edge Left 5 Press OK Color mode Auto Color Color Grayscale Auto Color Color Black and White Full Color Grayscale Black and White Auto Color Color Grayscale Auto Color Color
2. w Il lil li I j NOTE When placing the original on the platen be sure to copy the originals in page order OPERATION GUIDE 4 13 Copying Functions Types of Page Boundary Lines The following types of the boundary lines are available Borders Cropmark The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below 1 2 3 Ready to copy mae 4 Layout 5 7 g Place original B Right then Left then Down Down None Leal N a Border Line 6 Top Edge Top Down then Down then Right feai Original Orientation 08 08 2009 10 10 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Layout Edit and then Combine Press 2 in 1 or 4 in 1 and choose the page layout of Layout Press Border Line to choose the type of the lines to indicate page boundaries Press OK Press Original Orientation to choose orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Then press OK Press OK Press the Start key Copying begins If the original is pl
3. Optional Document Processor Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional document processor 1 Remove any paper from the original tray 2 Open the document processor top cover 3 Remove any paper If the original tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine OPERATION GUIDE 10 25 Troubleshooting Optional Document Finisher If the original is difficult to remove turn the dial The original will scroll out to a position where it can be removed easily If the original tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine Lift up reverse unit Remove the paper If the original tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine Put reverse unit back in its original place and close the document processor top cover Reload the originals on the document processor tray If a misfeed occurs in the optional document finisher refer to the respective Operation Guides to clear the jam 10 26 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting Built in Finisher Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional built in finisher 1 Remove any paper in the output section If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 2 Remove the output tray 3 Liftup the handle on left cover 1 and open left cover 1 4 Remove any paper 5 Clos
4. W A e B4 A4 R B5 lhe g I lll Folio A4 R B5 R OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions Use the procedure below to send mixed sized originals as a batch 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the original into the document processor IMPORTANT When you place originals of different width place the top edge of originals to align with the width guide at the backside If the originals are placed unevenly they may not be scanned correctly 3 Press Original Sending Data Format and then Mixed Sized Originals a Ready to send Destination 4 Select the combination of originals from Resi 1 Same Width and Different Width Scan all sheets in the document processor 5 Press O K even if differently sized then send Up to 30 sheets can be placed in the document processor for mixed size originals E MS off Same Width Different Width Add Shortcut 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending OPERATION GUIDE 5 9 Sending Functions 1 sided 2 sided Selection Select the type and binding of original depending on the original The table below lists the binding directions for each original type Original Binding 1 sided Sheet Original 1 sided 2 sided Sheet Original 2 sided Binding Left Right Binding
5. Cancel lel 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Specify the destination 6 Place the original and press the Start key When the scanning is completed change the settings as necessary 7 Place the next original and press the Start key Scan the remaining originals by the same procedure When you have scanned all the originals press Finish Scan to start sending 5 22 OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions Border Erase Use Border Erase to remove black shadows that appear around the outside of the original when scanning and sending originals The following options can be selected Border Erase Sheet Erases black borders around the single sheet original Original Border Erase Book Erases black borders around the edges and in the middle of the original such as a thick book You can specify the widths individually to erase the borders around the edges and in the center of the book Original Individual Border Erase Specify border erase widths individually for all edges Original In each option the available ranges are as below Input units Border Erase Range Inch models 0 to 2 in 0 01 increments Metric models 0 mm to 50 mm in 1 mm increments OPERATION GUIDE 5 23 Sending Functions Border Erase to Back Page When scanning a 2 sided original this allows you to erase the borders on the back of the original The table below shows the availa
6. Press Start key to start printing Copies Press Cancel to change settings 1 Original position 2 Output z al Shortcut 2 tray a am Paper Shortcut 3 source i Shortcut 4 ta Co Shortcut 5 zi Shortcut 6 2 Org Paper Quali ayout Edit Advanced inca M 08 08 2009 10 10 Size orientation of original and paper TLS E Zoom 100 Paper Letter 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Cancel Quick Setup Status 3 4 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Original Preview You can display a preview image of the scanned document on the panel NOTE To view a preview of an image stored in a Custom Box refer to Previewing Documents Checking Document Details on page 3 39 The procedure for previewing scanned originals is explained below The procedure described here is for copying a single page original Ready to copy Copies Place original f Shortcut 2 ld Shortcut 3 j ji o ti Pet Pay Vie Auto 100 Shortcut 4 iginal o Paper Zoom Original cose Laie Shortcut 5 ape 5 Staple Punch SEE 6 j 2 sided 2in1 gt gt 2 sided 08 08 2009 10 10 SI j j Duplex Combine 1 hortcut 1 Advanced l Press Start key to start printing Copies g Press Cancel to change settings Copy Image RS Shortcut 1 g i Auto 100 Normal 0 Shortcut 4 OE ETRE Pi Z Densil Original Letter Harem aon nly
7. OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type Ready to copy Paper Selection MP Tray Setting id eas e Ea t Legal Statement f Executive o 8 5x13 5 9 OficioII o Plain Media Type Cancel OK 08 08 2009 10 10 Original Size Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others a A 5 83 17 00 3 86 11 69 Plain Cancel amp OK 08 08 2009 10 10 Media Type 1 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Org Paper Finishing Paper Selection and then MP Tray Setting Press Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others or Size Entry to select the paper size If you select Size Entry press or to specify X horizontal and Y vertical sizes You can enter the size directly using the numeric keys after pressing Keys Press Media Type Select paper type and press OK Press OK Press OK Press the Start key to start scanning the originals When the machine is ready the confirmation screen for the specified paper appears Load the required paper in the multi purpose tray and press Continue to start copying OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Mixed Sized Originals Using the optional document processor the originals of different sizes can be loaded in a batch and copied In this operation up
8. Original Produces a 1 sided copy of a 2 sided or open book original The following binding options are available Binding Left Originals with facing pages are copied from left to right Binding Right Originals with facing pages are copied from right to left NOTE The following sizes of originals and paper are supported in Two sided to One sided and Book to One sided Original Ledger Letter R A3 B4 A4 R B5 R A5 R and 8K Paper Letter A4 B5 and 16K You may change paper size and reduce or enlarge copy to match that size Produces two sided copies from an open book original with facing pages NOTE The following sizes of originals and paper are supported in Book to Two sided mode Original Ledger Letter R A3 B4 A4 R B5 R A5 R and 8K Paper Letter A4 and B5 The procedure for using two sided duplex copying is explained below Ready to copy Copies t sided gt gt 1 sided Finishing T 7 Ed 2 Top Edge Top Left Right Te Book eft Rig op es sl Z Cancel 08 08 2009 10 10 Add Shortcut 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Layout Edit and then Duplex 4 Select the desired Duplex option 5 If you choose 1 sided gt gt 2 sided or 2 sided gt gt 2 sided select the binding edge of the finished copies of Finishing If you choose Book gt gt 2 sided press Book gt gt 2 sided
9. 10 2 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting Symptom Printouts are too dark Checkpoints Is the machine in Auto Density mode Corrective Actions Set the correct density level for auto density Reference Page Is the machine in Manual Density mode Use Image Quality to set the correct density level When changing the default density level adjust the density manually and choose the desired level Copies have a moire pattern dots grouped together in patterns and not aligned uniformly Is the original a printed photograph Set the image quality to Print Photo Printouts are not clear Did you choose appropriate image quality for the original Select appropriate image quality Printouts are dirty Is the platen or the document processor dirty Clean the platen or the document processor Is the transfer roller dirty Brush the transfer roller clean Is the drum dirty Is the Printed Document Guard Kit enabled Carry out Drum Refresh Disable the Printed Document Guard Kit Printouts are fuzzy Is the machine being used in very humid conditions Carry out Drum Refresh Images are skewed Are the originals placed correctly When placing originals on the platen align them with the original size indicator plates When placing originals in the optional document processor align the original width guides securely before
10. Paper Size Maximum Ledger A3 Minimum Statement R A5 R Paper Weight 45 to 160 g m Loading Capacity 100 sheets 50 to 80 g m maximum Mixed original sizes auto selection 30 sheets 50 to 80 g m maximum Dimensions 22 23 32 x 21 x 7 5 64 W x D x H 577 x 534 x 180 mm Weight Approx 26 Ibs Approx 12 kg Dual scan DP model Approx 29 Ibs Approx 13 kg Paper Feeder option Item Description Paper Supply Friction Feed No Sheets 500 80 g m 2 cassettes Method Paper Size Ledger Legal Oficio Il 8 5x13 5 Letter Letter R Statement R A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R Folio 8K 16K 16K R Supported Paper Paper weight 60 160 g m Media types standard recycled color Dimensions 23 1 32 x 23 15 64 x 12 13 32 W x D x H 585 x 590 x 315 mm Weight Approx 57 Ibs Approx 26 kg 3 000 Sheet Paper Feeder option Item Description Paper Supply Friction Feed No Sheets 3 000 80 g m Method Paper Size A4 B5 Letter Supported Paper Paper weight 60 105 g m Media types standard recycled color Appendix 24 OPERATION GUIDE Description Dimensions 23 x 23 5 8 x 12 23 64 W x D x H 585 x 600 x 314 mm Weight Approx 50 71 Ibs Approx 23 kg Document Finisher option Description Number of Trays 1 tray Paper Size Ledger Legal Oficio II 8 5x13 5 A3 B4 8K 500 sheets Non stapling Letter
11. Use the procedure below 1 a fF Q N Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network Next of Secure Protocol and then Change of LDAP Security Press Off LDAP over SSL or LDAPv3 TLS Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 8 70 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu IPSec Setting Sets up IPSec The default setting is Off Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network and then Change of IPSec NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Press On 4 Press OK 5 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 LAN Interface Setup Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used The default setting is Auto Use the procedure below GH 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network and then Change of LAN Interface 3 Select Auto 10BASE T Half 10BASE T Full
12. FTP Path Login User Name Login Password il Specify the folder on the destination in connection To specify another destination go to the step 6 To specify only one destination go to step 7 NOTE Connected appears when connection to the destination is correctly established If Cannot connect appears review the entry Add to Addr Book Next Dest Cancel el OK 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Press Next Dest and repeat steps 3 to 5 to specify the destination You can specify a combined total of up to 10 FTP and SMB destination folders NOTE When Add to Addr Book is displayed the entry is registered in the Address Book 7 Press OK to register the entry in the destination list OPERATION GUIDE 3 27 Basic Operation a Ready to send Destination Place original Destination I ABCD abcd efg com TUVW 10 200 188 120 Groupi 0001 0002 0003 E 0004 0006 0007 0008 gt 0009 0010 E 1 100 Destination Quick Setup crional sending a iy ow 2009 10 10 8 Check the destination list Select a destination and press Detail Edit to check and edit it Edit it if necessary referring to steps 3 to 5 Select a destination and press Delete to remove the destination from the list NOTE When On is selected in FTP Encrypted TX page 5 31 keys appear for selecting the encryption method for the FTP transmission destination Select Auto DES 3DES or
13. Perform Gray Adjustment in the System Menu is displayed Over long periods of use the effects of the ambient temperature and humidity can cause color output hues to vary slightly Whenever the printed hues differ from the original document or image carry out Gray Adjustment OPERATION GUIDE 10 5 Troubleshooting Responding to Error Messages If the touch panel displays any of these messages follow the corresponding procedure Alphanumeric Error Message Acceptable staple count exceeded Checkpoints Is the acceptable staple count exceeded For details refer to Specifications on page Appendix 26 Corrective Actions Press Continue to print without stapling Press Cancel to cancel the job Reference Page Add paper in cassette 1 Is the indicated cassette out of paper Load paper Add paper in Multi Purpose tray Is the paper of the selected size loaded in the multi purpose tray Load the paper in the multi purpose tray which is of the size and type indicated on the touch panel Add staples Has any of the document finisher run out of staples If the staples are depleted the machine will stop and the location of staple depletion will be indicated on the touch panel Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to replace the staple case Press Continue to print without stapling Press Cancel to cancel the job Add to
14. saan NOTE Select Name and ID from the Sort pull down 01 Account 00001000 Sector menu to sort the account list beatin ee Sanao Press Search Name or Search ID to search by koiaa kanai Sie ean account name or account ID 04 Account 00004000 05 Account 00005000 Cancel e OK Status 08 08 2009 10 10 18 Press Register to add a new user on the local user list 11 6 OPERATION GUIDE Management Changing User Properties User properties can be changed Types of user properties that could be changed may be different depending on user access privilege For a user with administrator rights who logs in User properties can be changed and users can be deleted The items which can be added are all able to be changed Use the procedure below to change the user properties 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of User Login Setting and Register Edit of Local User List 5 Select the user whose properties you wish to change NOTE Select Name and Login Name from the Sort pull down menu to sort the user list Press Search Name or Searc
15. 11 Press Subnet Mask and enter the address using the numeric keys 12 Press Default Gateway and enter the address using the numeric keys 13 Check if all the address entries are correct and press OK 14 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 DHCP Settings Select whether or not to use the DHCP server The default setting is On Use the procedure below Press the System Menu key N Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting Press Change of TCP IP Press On and then press OK Press Change of IPv4 Press DHCP Press On or Off of DHCP and then press OK oN O A Aa W After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 Bonjour Settings Select whether or not to use Bonjour The default setting is Off Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting OPERATION GUIDE 2 13 Preparation before Use Auto IP Settings oN O A A O Press Change of TCP IP Press On and then press OK Press Change of IPv4 Press Bonjour Press On or Off of Bonjour and then press OK After changing the
16. Original Orientation Original Orientation Original Orientation Left Top Edge Left top Left Top Edge Left top Direction corner corner A mM wy lt Built in Finisher To ae Cassette Paper Load A Direction Built in Finisher Cassette Paper Load E Ne Use the procedure below to produce stapled copies Ready to copy Staple Punch Te 25 2 staple tek Bal top ER 1 2 staples Right 5 if Right S 2 stapl yy Bind ee EM op Edge Top Original Orientation Add Shortcut 08 08 2009 10 10 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Org Paper Finishing and then Staple Punch 4 Select the staple position NOTE To use saddle stitching press Bind and Fold When placing originals be sure to place the cover page at the bottom For more information on saddle stitching refer to Booklet from Sheets on page 4 19 5 Press Original Orientation to choose orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Then press OK Press OK Press the Start key Copying begins 3 18 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Punch Punch holes in sets of finished copies in preparation for binding NOTE Requires the optional 3 000 sheet document finisher and punching unit The orientations of the original and corresponding punch posit
17. Print on both sides re Se rC Of KYOCERA About Profile d fad 100 Auto source selection Auto media selection Page Sizes Printer default I Rotated f Le Let Let Le Restore Defaults Cancel Select the Basic tab and click Page Size button to select the paper size To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency click the Media Type menu and select the media type 7 Click Source and select the paper source NOTE If you choose Auto Select paper is supplied automatically from the paper source loaded with paper of optimum size and type To print on special paper such as envelope or thick paper place it on the multi purpose tray and select MP Tray 8 9 Select paper orientation either Portrait or Landscape to match the orientation of the document Selecting Rotate 180 will print the document rotated 180 Click OK button to return to the Print dialog box 10 Click OK button to start printing 3 22 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Sending This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E mail message or to a PC linked to the network In order to do this it is necessary to register the sender and destination recipient address on the network A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required It is recommended that a Local Area Network LAN be used to assist
18. Repeat Copy Box page 6 15 e Deleting a Form Stored page 6 18 Quick Setup Registration Select the Storing in Box Sending from Box Printing from Box functions to be registered for Quick Setup Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary The options are as follows Store File Quick Setup Color Selection Storing Size Density 2 sided Book Original Resolution Zoom Original Orientation Original Size Original Image Continuous Scan Print Quick Setup Paper Selection Collate Offset Staple Punch Duplex Combine Delete after Printed Send Quick Setup Sending Size FAX TX Resolution File Format Delete after Transmitted 8 32 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press the System Menu key Press Document Box Removable Memory and Next of Quick Setup Registration Press Next of Store File Print or Send Press Change of the function to be registered in Quick Setup Select a key 1 6 allocated on the Quick Setup screen Press Off to delete a key from the Quick Setup Press OK If you overwrite the setting a confirmation screen appears Press Yes OPERATION GUIDE 8 33 Default Setting System Menu Printer Settings Printing from computers settings are generally made on the application software screen However the following settings
19. 4 8 seconds or less Resolution 600 dpi Operating System Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Apple Macintosh OS 10 x Interface Standard USB Interface Connector 1 USB Hi Speed Network interface 1 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX Page Description Language Scanner PRESCRIBE Item Description Operating System Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later Windows XP Windows Vista System requirements CPU 600Mhz or higher RAM 128MB or more Resolution 600 dpi 400 dpi 300 dpi 200 dpi 200 x100 dpi 200 x 400 dpi Resolution in FAX mode included File Format TIFF MMR JPEG compression JPEG XPS PDF MMR JPEG compression PDF high compression Scanning Speed 1 1 sided B W 52 Images min Interface Ethernet 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX Network Protocol TCP IP Transmission System SMB Scan to SMB FTP Scan to FTP FTP over SSL E mail transmission SMTP Scan to E mail TWAIN scan WIA scan PC transmission 4 When using the dual scan document processor except TWAIN and WIA scanning 2 Available Operating System Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later Windows XP Windows Vista 3 Available Operating System Windows Vista OPERATION GUIDE Appendix 23 Document Processor option Item Description Original Feed Automatic feed Method Supported Sheet originals Original Types
20. Common operation Description Displays the message that indicates the machine detected the document guard pattern and stops scanning the remaining documents Copy functions Prints the documents in blank from the position that the machine detected the document guard pattern Document Box functions Send functions Does not store the documents in the hard disk Cancels the job FAX functions Does not send the documents Sends the documents that are scanned before the document guard pattern is detected if you have selected File Separation If not every documents will not to be sent OPERATION GUIDE 8 73 Default Setting System Menu Limitations Scanning speed will be limited to the speed of scanning 600 dpi image Printing speed will not be limited FAX transmission will be limited to the memory transmission Note The Printed Document Guard Kit should not fully prevents a leak of information We do not guarantee any loss incurred while using this feature or when malfunction occurred with this feature The guard pattern printed on the colored paper or paper that is decorated with special design may not be detected We do not guarantee the integrity of the detection If the malfunction occurs contact your service representative Use the procedure below to specify the Document Guard setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System and then Next of Optional
21. Login Logout If job accounting is enabled an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine Use the procedure below to login and logout Login 1 Inthe screen below enter the account ID using the Tene numeric keys and press Login NOTE If you entered a wrong character press the Clear key and enter the account ID again If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID a warning beep will sound and login will fail Enter the correct account ID By pressing Counter Check you can refer to the ekon number of pages printed and the number of pages uii 8 scanned When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears If user login administration is enabled the screen to enter the login user name and password appears Enter a login user name and password to login Refer to Login Logout on page 11 3 If the user has already registered the account information the account ID entry would be skipped Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 2 Proceed to complete the rest of the steps Logout When the operations are complete press the Logout key to return to the account ID entry screen OPERATION GUIDE 11 15 Management Adding an Account This section explains how to add a new account The following entries are required Item Description Account Name Enter the account name up to 32 characters Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eig
22. 5 Push the cassette back in place securely 6 Close left cover 3 Multi Purpose Tray Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the multi purpose tray 1 Remove the paper from the multi purpose tray OPERATION GUIDE 10 19 Troubleshooting Inside the Left Covers 1 3 and 4 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside left cover 1 3 or 4 when using the optional paper feeder 1 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover 1 2 Remove the paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 3 Press the specified position to close left cover 1 Duplex Unit Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the duplex unit 1 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover 10 20 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting 2 Remove the paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 3 Press the specified position to close left cover 1 De Z gt gt Lie Ie N A f S V KZE S NN Duplex Unit and Cassette 1 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in duplex unit and cassette 1 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover 1 2 Remove any paper YY m YE i If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 10 21 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting 3 Lift duplex unit
23. Auto Image Rotatoria neisd a ie edod 4 32 Negative Mag E eaii a A TE WINGS EEE EEE E E E EA A E AJOD FMSP NOCO rasinn nein aien A File NAME eiren ned 1 35 Phony eS ananena ee Repeal CODY pernp ENEE E EEEE EEEE Enan A OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Original Size Specify the size of originals being scanned Be sure to specify the original size when copying non standard sizes The following options are available Standard Sizes 1 How to Select Have the size of original detected automatically or select from the standard sizes Inch models Auto Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il and 11x15 Metric models Auto A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 A5 R B6 B6 R A6 R and Folio Standard Sizes 2 Select from the standard sizes not included in the Standard Sizes 1 Inch models A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 A5 R B6 B6 R A6 R Folio 8K 16K and 16K R Metric models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il 11x15 8K 16K and 16K R Select from envelope postcard or the custom sized originals Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Custom 1 to 4 Size Entry Enter the size not included in the standard sizes 1 and 2 Inch models Horizontal 2 to 17 in 0 01 increments Vertical 2 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models Horizontal 50 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Vertic
24. Cannot staple at the specified position Have you selected a position that cannot be stapled Select a position that can be stapled Press Continue to print without using Staple Cannot staple this paper Did you select a paper size type that cannot be stapled Select the available paper size type Press Continue to print without using Staple Check the cover Is there any cover which is open Close the cover indicated on the touch panel Check the document processor Is the document processor open Close the document processor Is the top cover of the document processor open Close the top cover of the document processor Check the finisher Clean the slit glass Is the document finisher set correctly Set the document finisher correctly For details refer to the respective Operation Guides Clean the slit glass using the cleaning cloth supplied with the document processor Confidential document is detected The machine detects the documents guard pattern The scanned document is printed in blank and sending of the document is canceled Failed to specify Job Accounting Failed to store job retention data The job is canceled Press End The job is canceled Press End OPERATION GUIDE 10 7 Troubleshooting Error Message FAX box limit exceeded Checkpoints Corrective Actions FAX box is full and no furt
25. Document Box Deleting a Document You can delete documents stored in the Quick Copy Proof and Hold box Use the procedure below to delete a document 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Job Box Quick Copy Proof and Hold then Open 3 Select the creator of the document and press Open 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Select the document to delete and press Delete The delete confirmation screen appears LJ D 2File 10 10 2008 09 45 30 MB g B 3File 10 10 2008 09 50 36 MB aie 10 10 2008 09 55 21 MB paai LJ 5File 10 10 2008 10 00 4 Close 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Press Yes The document is deleted Repeat Copy Box Setting the Number of Stored Jobs To maintain free space on the hard disk you can set the maximum number of stored jobs Use the procedure below to specify the maximum number of stored jobs 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Document Box Removable Memory Next of Job Box Change of Repeat Copy Job Retention OPERATION GUIDE 6 15 Document Box Document Box Removable Memory Repeat Copy Job Retention i Set the maximum number of repeat copy jobs to retain Use or the numeric keys to enter a number Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs 0 50 32 job s E Printing a Document 3 Use the and keys or the numeric keys to enter the maximum number of stored jobs You can enter any number between 0 an
26. E mail Subject Body Add Shortcut Cancel 4 OK Status 08 08 2009 10 10 When sending E mail enter the subject and body of the E mail Use the procedure below to enter the subject and body for an E mail message and then send the E mail 1 Press the Send key 2 Press Advanced Setup and then E mail Subject Body 3 Press Subject 4 Enter the subject and press OK NOTE Up to 60 characters can be entered for the subject 5 Press Body 6 Enter the body and press OK NOTE Up to 500 characters can be entered for the body 7 Press OK 8 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 5 26 OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions WSD Scan WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD compatible computer NOTE To use WSD Scan confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network connected and WSD Scan Setup page 8 68 is set to On in the network settings For information on operating the computer refer to the computer s help or the operation guide of your software Installing Driver Software for Windows Vista 1 Click Start and then Network in the computer 2 Right click the machine s icon and then click Install 5 NOTE If the User Account Control window appears click Continue If the Found New Hardware window appears click Cancel 3 During the installation double c
27. OPERATION GUIDE 552402en PUBLICATION ISSUED BY Olivetti S p A Gruppo Telecom Italia Via Jervis 77 10015 Ivrea ITALY www olivetti com Copyright 2009 Olivetti All rights reserved The mark affixed to the product certifies that the product satisfies the basic quality requirements C 4 The manufacturer reserves the right to carry out modifications to the product described in this manual at any time and without any notice ENERGY STAR is a U S registered mark ENERGY STAR The ENERGY STAR program is an energy reduction plan introduced by theUnited States Environmental Protection Agency in response to environmental issues and for the purpose of advancing the development and utilization of more energy efficient office equipment Your attention is drawn to the following actions which could compromise the conformity attested to above as well as the characteristics of the product e incorrect electrical power supply e incorrect installation incorrect or improper use or use not in compliance with the warnings provided in the User s Manual supplied with the product e replacement of original components or accessories with others of a type not approved by the manufacturer or performed by unauthorised personnel All rights reserved No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage a
28. The items you can check are described below Scanner The status of an original scanning in the document processor optional or the error information paper jam opened cover etc is displayed Printer Error information such as paper jam out of toner or out of paper and status such as waiting or printing are displayed Hard Disk The information such as formatting overwriting for erasure and error occurrence is displayed 7 16 OPERATION GUIDE Status Job Cancel Configuring the Devices Hard Disk Removable Memory Not connected Format Remove FAX Port 1 Line off Manual RX J Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device Paper Supplies Communication Status 08 08 2009 10 10 Detailed information on controlling devices is given below Removable Memory USB Memory e The usage and capacity of the external media connected to this machine are displayed e Press Format to format external media e Press Remove to safely remove the external media For details refer to Removing the USB Memory in the next section FAX Port 1 FAX Port 2 The information such as sending receiving and dialing is displayed e Press Line Off to cancel a fax in sending receiving For details refer to Canceling FAX Communication on page 7 78 in the section afterwards e Press Manual RX to start a fax Use this function when you want to talk to the sender before receiving the fax originals For details refer
29. Type Job Name Result 000001 10 10 09 50 doci0102008095050 InProcess 000002 10 10 09 55 doci0102008095510 Waiting 000003 10 10 10 00 doc10102008091000 Waiting Pause All rancel Priority Move Up Detail Print Jobs Override a gy S S D Printing Jobs end bs Storing Jobs Device Paper S eS py Sn feet Peay 3 When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused press Resume All Print Jobs Canceling of Jobs For more information on canceling jobs refer to the Canceling Jobs on page 3 42 OPERATION GUIDE 7 13 Status Job Cancel Priority Override for Waiting Jobs Priority Override function suspends the current job and prints the job in waiting first The procedure for using Priority Override is explained below 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 Press Printing Jobs 3 Select the job to be given priority and press Satis Priority Override Job Type All Job No End Date Type Job Name Result 000001 10 10 09 50 doci0102008095050 InProcess 000002 10 10 09 55 doci0102008095510 Waiting 000003 10 10 10 00 doc10102008091000 Waiting Pause All Cancel E Move Up Detail Print Jobs E Printing Jobs a 5 Storing Jobs Device Paper Supplies m T 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Press Yes in the confirmation screen The current job in printing is suspended and the job for override printing starts 5 When the Priority Override is completed
30. 100BASE TX Half or 100BASE TX Full as the LAN interface 4 Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 OPERATION GUIDE 8 71 Default Setting System Menu Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces The following interface block settings are available e USB Host USB memory slot setting e USB Device USB interface setting e Optional interface Optional interface card setting USB Host USB memory slot setting This locks and protects the USB memory slot A1 or USB port A2 USB host The default setting is Unblock Use the procedure below to specify the USB Host setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Interface Block Setting and then Change of USB Host NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user _ name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Press Block 4 Press OK USB Device USB interface setting This locks and protects the USB interface connector B1 USB Device The default setting is Unblock Use the
31. 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting Next of Default Setting Change of Count by Paper Size Change of Paper Size 1 to 5 and then On User Login Job Accounting Paper Size 1 Select the paper size i Select the paper sizes and types to count Press Media Type to specify media type Select the media type and press OK ES ES Press Close Legal Plai Statement an Media Type f Cancel al OK 08 08 2009 10 10 OPERATION GUIDE 11 25 Management Printing an Accounting Report Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered When Split is selected for Managing the Copier Printer Count ACCOUNT REPORT MFP Firmware Version For the count by paper size the report will be printed by size Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report 1 Check that Letter or A4 paper is loaded in the cassette Press the System Menu key Press User Login Job Accounting If user login administra
32. Default Setting System Menu Secure Protocol Encrypt the communication between your PC and the machine using the SSL encryption After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 The following Secure Protocol settings are available e SSL Setup 8 69 e IPP Security Setup 8 69 e HTTP Security Setup 8 69 e LDAP Security Setup 8 70 SSL Setup Select whether or not to use SSL The default setting is On Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network Next of Secure Protocol and then Next of SSL 3 Press On or Off 4 Press OK GE 5 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 IPP Security Setup Select the IPP security level This setup is available when SSL is On The default setting is PP over SSL Only NOTE IPP must be set to On in Protocol Detail on page 8 66 Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network Next of Secure Protocol and then Change of IPP Security 3 Press IPP over SSL Only or IPP or IPP over SSL 4 Press OK 5 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For
33. E Operation Guide FAX System S Operation Guide 2 2 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network and prepare the necessary cables Connection Example Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network cable 100BASE TX or 10BASE T Embedded Web Server eee Network Send E mail Administrator s PC Network settings Scanner i default settings User and Sends the image data destination registration a of scanned originals to the desired recipient as a file attached to an E mail message Printing Send SMB Saves the scanned ates N image as a data file on your PC i E E Network Send FTP E ry Sends the scanned l image as a data file on the FTP Network FAX Option mot R N TWAIN Scanning FAX Option H IL Network WIA Scanning TWAIN and WIA are 4 standardized interface for communication between software applications and image acquisition devices Network IL OPERATION GUIDE 2 3 Preparation before Use Preparing Necessary Cables The following interfaces are available to connect the equipment to a PC Prepare the necessary cables according to the
34. File Format 4 Select the file format from PDF TIFF JPEG XPS and High Comp PDF When the color mode in scanning has been selected for Grayscale or Full Color set the image quality If you selected PDF or High Comp PDF press Encryption and specify the encryption settings 5 Press OK 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page and send the files Use the procedure below to split scanned original data into separate files when sending scanned originals Destination gs Ready to send Place original File Separation i Create and send a file for each page of the original that was read aaa Cancel e OK 08 08 2009 10 10 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Original Sending Data Format and then File Separation 4 Press Each Page to set File Separation 5 Press OK 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key The scanned original is sent after being divided into files of one page each NOTE Three digit serial number such as abc_001 pdf abc_002 pdf is attached to the end of the file name OPERATION GUIDE 5 13 Sending Functions PDF Encryption Functions If you have selected PDF or High Comp PDF for file format you can restrict the access level for displaying printing and editing PDF s by assigning a secu
35. If one of the lines is dedicated to receiving the busy line time can be reduced For further details refer to Fax Kit Operation Guide Expansion Memory Image storage memory 128 MB that allows the machine to receive more pages of incoming faxed originals Expansion memory should only be installed or removed by the service representative Data Security Kit The Data Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the storage area of the hard disk so that it cannot be retrieved The Data Security Kit encrypts data before storing it in the hard disk It guarantees higher security because no data cannot be decoded by ordinary output or operations Printed Document Guard Kit This prevents the unauthorized copying and or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or personal information When a document is printed from a computer this feature imprints a special pattern on the document When anyone attempts to copy or send that document on this machine the machine detects the pattern and protects the information by printing the document in blank prohibiting transmission Document Table Place original or other documents when using the machine It has a drawer to accommodate clips OPERATION GUIDE Appendix 9 Character Entry Method To enter characters for a name use the on display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained below NOTE QWERTY QWERTZ and AZERTY are available as keyboa
36. OK ee l j fe a a i type for best results fea for OCR For documents to be read by OCR Place original Add Shortcut 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 5 16 OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions Adjusting Density Use the procedure below to adjust the density when scanning the originals The table below shows the available settings Manual Adjust density using 7 or 13 levels Auto Optimum density is selected according to the density of the original The procedure for adjusting the density is explained below Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality and then Density 4 ral Ready to send sae When selecting manual density adjustment press Place original 1 3 to 3 Lighter Darker to adjust density When selecting auto density adjustment press Auto 5 Press OK FH SN RO EO FE pA Cancel lel OK 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending OPERATION GUIDE 5 17 Sending Functions Scan Resolution Select the fineness of scanning resolution The finer the scanning becomes the larger the number becomes the better the image quality becomes However better resolution also results in larger file size file capacity and longer scanning and sending times The selectable resolution is 200x100dpi Normal 20
37. Priority Override 4 Press On to select Priority Override Press OK 6 Press the Start key The current copy job is suspended and the copy job selected in Priority Override starts The suspended job resumes after Priority Override copying is finished OPERATION GUIDE 4 35 Copying Functions Repeat Copy Enable additional copies in the desired quantity as necessary after a copy job is completed For confidential documents you can set up a pass code for the use of Repeat Copy In such a case the correct pass code must be entered when using Repeat Copy or copies will not be delivered IMPORTANT A Repeat Copy job is cleared when the main power switch is turned off Repeat Copy is not available when the machine is equipped with the optional Data Security Kit Repeat Copy cannot be used when the maximum number of Repeat Copy jobs to retain in the document box is set to zero refer to Maximum Number of Repeat Copy Jobs Retained on page 4 37 You can select Repeat Copy as default setting Refer to Repeat Copying on page 8 23 Giving a file name to a copy job will facilitate identification of the data when copying refer to File Name on page 4 35 Selecting Repeat Copy Use the procedure below to select repeat copying 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Advanced Setup and then Repeat Copy Ready to copy copies 4 Press On Repeat Copy To register a password press Keys
38. and enter a 4 digit password Password 4digits IMPORTANT If you forget the pass code Repeat Copy will be unavailable Make a note of the pass code beforehand if necessary 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Press OK 6 Press the Start key to start copying and register this job as a Repeat Copy job 4 36 OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs The Repeat Copy jobs are stored in the Document Box Refer to Job Box on page 3 33 to print out the Repeat Copy jobs Maximum Number of Repeat Copy Jobs Retained You can use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy jobs that can be retained in the document box Use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy jobs retained 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Document Box Removable Memory and then Next of Job Box Press Change of Repeat Copy Job Retention 4 Use the or key to enter the maximum retention number _ Document Box Removable Memory Repeat Copy Job Retention i Set the maximum number of repeat copy jobs to retain Use or the numeric keys to enter a number Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs You can also enter the number from the numeric keys 0 50 32 bc A number between 0 and 50 can be entered as the E number of retained jobs NOTE If you enter a value of 0 zero you cannot use the Repeat Copy function 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Press O
39. only by the machine administrator First User Login Administration Follow these steps for the first user login administration Enable user login administration page 11 2 v Add a user page 11 5 v Log out page 11 4 v The registered user logs in for operations page 11 3 Enabling Disabling User Login Administration This enables user login administration Select one of the following authentication methods Item Description Local Authentication User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the machine Network Authentication User authentication based on Authentication Server Use a user property stored in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page Use the procedure below to enable user login administration 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of User Login Setting and then Change of User Login 11 2 OPERATION GUIDE Management User Login Job Accounting User Login i User login administration Select authentication method Off Host Name Local r l Authentication i AOE Domain Name Network
40. or Book gt gt Book of Finishing to select the setting for duplex 3 12 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Ready to copy Copies 6 Ifyou choose 2 sided gt gt 1 sided B 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Book gt gt 1 sided or Book gt gt 2 sided select the binding edge of the gt gt 1 sided E IN originals of Original 1 sided gt gt 2 sided Bindin Bindin Zsided y LeRaht 7 Press Original Orientation to select orientation of Nian the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge gt gt 2 sided Left Then press OK 3 0 8 Press OK Add Shortcut Cancel d OK 08 08 2009 10 10 9 Press the Start key Once an original placed on the platen is scanned replace it with the next one Then press the Start key After scanning all originals press Finish Scan to start copying Collate Offset Copying The machine can collate and offset at the same time as it copies You can use the Collate Offset copy function for tasks such as those shown below Collate Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of copies as required according to page number Original Offset Without Document Finisher If the optional document finisher is not installed when you use Offsetting printed copies are produced after rotating each set or page by 90 NOTE You need to load the same sized paper with different orienta
41. other over a network TCP IP IPv6 TCP IP IPv6 is based on the current Internet protocol TCP IP IPv4 IPv6 is the next generation Internet protocol and expands the available address space which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4 while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission TWAIN Technology Without Any Interested Name A technical specification for connecting scanners digital cameras and other image equipment to the computers The TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software TWAIN is adopted on a large amount of graphic software e g Adobe Photoshop and OCR software USB Universal Serial Bus 2 0 A USB interface standard for Hi Speed USB 2 0 The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps This machine is equipped with USB 2 0 for high speed data transfer Appendix 30 OPERATION GUIDE WIA Windows Imaging Acquisition A function to import images supported after Windows Me XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices This function replaces what TWAIN used to do the feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of operation so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application OPERATION GUIDE Appendix 31 Appendix 32 OPERATION GUIDE Index Index Numerics 1 sided 2 sided Selection 5 1
42. the printing job that has been suspended will be resumed Reordering Print Jobs This function allows you to select a queued print job and raise its output priority The procedure for reordering print jobs is explained below 1 Press the Status Cancel key 2 Press the Printing Jobs 3 Select the job to be assigned a higher priority and Status press Move Up ali ian The priority of the selected job is increased by 1 000001 10 10 09 50 doci0102008095050 InProcess To further raise the job s priority press Move Up again Each time you press Move Up the priority increases by 1 000002 10 10 09 55 doci0102008095510 Waiting 000003 10 10 10 00 doci0102008091000 Pause All Cancel Priority Detail Print Jobs Overide A Printing Jobs Storing Jobs Pal ies E nas 08 08 2009 10 10 7 14 OPERATION GUIDE Status Job Cancel Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper Check the remaining amount of toner paper and staples on the touch panel Use the procedure below to check the remaining amounts 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 Press Paper Supplies Check the remaining amount of toner and the status of a waste toner box in Toner Information and the remaining amount of paper in each paper source in Paper Toner Information Ledger Ledger J Plain Letter UL Plain Letter UL Plain ca Letter LJ Plain aper Supplies 18 08 20 5 The items you can check are de
43. 2 Connect the USB cable to the appropriate interface located on the right side of the body 3 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC Connecting the Power Cable Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet IMPORTANT Only use the power cable that comes with the machine 2 6 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use Power On Off Power On When the main power indicator is lit Press the Power key Open the main power switch cover and turn the main power switch on NOTE If the optional Data Security Kit is installed a message might display indicating the security function is being activated and time may be taken to start up when the power is turned on IMPORTANT When turning off the main power switch do not turn on the main power switch again immediately Wait more than 5 seconds and then turn on the main power switch OPERATION GUIDE 2 7 Preparation before Use Power Off Before turning off the main power switch press the Power key on the operation panel to off Make sure that the Power key and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch CAUTION The hard disk may be operating when the Power key or Memory indicator is lit or blinking Turning off the main power switch while the hard disk is operating may cause damage Make sure that the indic
44. AES as the encryption method When selecting On for Entry Check for New Destination page 8 37 the confirmation screen appears Enter the same host name and path again and press OK When selecting On for Destination Check before Send page 8 30 the confirmation screen appears after pressing the Start key For details refer to Confirmation Screen of Destinations on page 3 29 3 28 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Confirmation Screen of Destinations When selecting On for Destination Check before Send page 8 30 the confirmation screen of destinations appears after pressing the Start key Follow the steps below to confirm the destinations a Ready to send Destination 1 Press v or A to confirm every destination Place original Destin Detal G _ Press Detail to display the detailed information on abcd efg com Ee A x the selected destination 10 200 188 120 zje CI Groupi Groupi le si oh To delete the destination select the destination you EOE E Ee E E o FM want to delete and press Delete Press Yes in the Entry HE WE a Je confirmation screen The destination is deleted See Entry 0006 ceo an a 0009 I g WSD Sean To add the destination press Cancel and then m a return to the destination screen ow 10 10 2 Press Check NOTE Be sure to confirm every destination by displaying them on the touch panel You cannot press Check unless you have confirm
45. Black and White Full Color Grayscale Black and White 1 Low Quality High Comp to 5 High Quality Low Comp Auto Color Color Grayscale Full Color Grayscale High Comp PDF 1 Low Quality High Comp to 5 High Quality Low Comp 1 Compression Ratio Priority to 3 Quality Priority Auto Color Color Grayscale Full Color Grayscale Auto Color Color Grayscale Auto Color Color Black and White Full Color Grayscale NOTE In the color mode when auto color color black and white is selected JPEG and XPS cannot be specified and when black and white is selected JPEG High Comp PDF and XPS cannot be specified When High Comp PDF is specified you cannot adjust the image quality In addition when previewing the color of the image by selecting High Comp PDF it may differ from the actual color You can use PDF encryption functions For details refer to the following PDF Encryption Functions 5 12 OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions Use the procedure below to select the file format for transmission Destination a4 Ready to send 2 PDF Image Quality lg F ec Standard Quality Ratio Priority Priority Place original i Be HighComp W DF Add Shortcut Off Encryption cs 08 08 2009 10 10 File Separation 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Original Sending Data Format and then
46. Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour Default Gateway This indicates the device such as a computer or router that serves as the entrance exit gateway for accessing computers outside the network that you are on When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway OPERATION GUIDE Appendix 27 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP that automatically resolves IP addresses subnet masks and gateway addresses on a TCP IP network DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned DHCP IPv6 DHCP IPv6 is the next generation of the Internet s Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6 It extends the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the network DHCP IPv6 permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an IPv6 node Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically the IPv6 node management workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise c
47. Check the domain name authentication server Check the host name Check the connection status with the server Responding to an Attention Indicator Flashes If an attention indicator flashes press Status Job Cancel to check an error message If the message is not indicated on the touch panel when Status Job Cancel is pressed or the attention indicator flashes for 1 5 seconds check the following Symptom Cannot send fax Checkpoints Is the modular cord connected correctly Corrective Actions Connect the modular cord correctly Reference Page Is Permitted FAX No or Permitted ID No registered correctly Check Permitted FAX No and Permitted ID No FAX System S Operation Guide Chapter 6 Registering Permit FAX No and Registering Permit ID No Has a communication error occurred Is the destination FAX line busy Does the destination FAX machine respond Is there an error other than above Check error codes in the TX RX Result Report and Activity Report If the error code starts with U or E perform the corresponding procedure Send again Send again Contact your Service Representative FAX System S Operation Guide Appendix Error Code List 10 14 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting Clearing Paper Jams Job No 000021 Job Name doc101020081010 User Name Mike Ifa paper jam occurs the touch panel will displ
48. Custom 1 8 5 Refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8 4 for selecting Custom 1 4 for Custom Paper Size i Refer to Paper Weight on page 8 7 for selecting Custom 1 8 from Media Type To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 8 10 NOTE To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Paper Weight on page 8 7 8 6 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for manual paper feed 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings Next of MP Tray Setting and then Change of Paper Size 3 To detect paper size automatically press Auto and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size To select paper size press Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others or Size Entry for Paper Size If you select Size Entry press to enter X horizontal and Y vertical dimensions Press Keys to enter the paper size using the numeric keys 4 Press OK The previous screen reappears 5 Press Change of Media Type to select the media type and press OK Paper Weight Select weight for each media type The options for media type and weight of paper are as follows Paper types and weights Y Available N Not available Paper Weight Norm
49. Function NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Select Document Guard from the list and then Activate 4 Enter the license key and press Official To use the function as a trial press Trial without entering the license key NOTE For details on how to enter the license key consult your dealer or service representative 8 74 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Optional Functions You can use the optional applications installed on this machine Overview of the Applications The applications listed below are installed on this machine You can use these applications for a limited period on a trial basis e Printed Document Guard Kit This prevents the unauthorized copying and or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or personal information When a document is printed from a computer this feature imprints a special pattern on the document When anyone attempts to copy or send that document on this machine the machine detects the pattern and protects the information by printing the document in blank prohibiting transmission NOTE Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period di
50. IP IPv6 Setup Set up TCP IP IPv6 to connect to the network The default settings are TCP IP Protocol On TCP IP IPv6 Off Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting Press Change of TCP IP Press On and then press OK Press Next of Pv6 Press Change of IPv6 Press On I P Address Link Local appears Press OK O OO N OO a A QORN After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 8 64 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Manual Setting IPv6 Manually specify the IP address prefix length and gateway address of TCP IP IPv6 The manual setting is available when selecting On for TCP IP IPv6 Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting 3 Press Next of Pv6 4 Press Next of Manual Setting 5 Press IP Address Manual to enter IP address The format of the IPv6 address is a sequence of numbers 128 bit in total separated by colons e g 2001 db8 3c4d 15 1a2c 1a1f 6 Press OK Press Keys of Prefix Length 0 128 to enter the prefix length using the numeric keys 7 Press Default Gateway to enter the default gateway 8 Check that all the entries are correct and Press
51. Ignore The setting is ignored and the job is printed Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed Use the procedure below to specify the settings for error handling 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings and then Next of Error Handling 3 Press Change at the error you wish to change the handling 4 Select the error handling method in the selection screen for each of the errors and then press OK 5 The previous screen appears To set the handling for a different error repeat steps 3 and 4 OPERATION GUIDE 8 13 Default Setting System Menu Paper Output Select output tray respectively for copy jobs print jobs from Custom Box computers and FAX RX data The options are as follows Output Tray Descriptions Top Tray Delivery on Top Tray of the machine Tray A Tray B Tray C Delivery to trays A to C in the optional 3 000 sheet document finisher Finisher Tray Delivery on Tray set to the optional built in finisher or document finisher Job Separator Delivery on the optional job separator Tray 1 to 7 Delivery to trays 1 to 7 in the optional mailbox tray 1 is the top tray Select Face Up print surface up or Face Down print surface down for paper orientation at output NOTE The optional job separator built in finisher document finisher or 3 000 sheet document finisher are required FAX RX data output can be specified when the optional fax
52. Job Build you can insert a blank paper during scanning or a blank page during duplex copying The procedure for making copies using Continuous Scan is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Press Advanced Setup and then Continuous Scan Ready to copy aS 3 If Continuous Scan is selected press On Continuous San If Job Build is selected press Job Build and select desired binding orientation 4 Press OK fo Binding Binding Binding Left Right Top Add Shortcut 08 08 2009 10 10 Scan nest orgs Copies 5 Place the originals in the document processor or on ace the originals and press ey Press Finish Scan to start copying the platen and press the Start key Job No 000021 Job Name doc20080505113414 User Name TR AD EF If Job Build is selected the next page can be a TLA E E E changed Press Sheet Insertion to insert a blank Orientation NE aa m Next Copy On Frant paper Press Next Copy On Back in duplex l s copying to print the next page on back page 2 sided Book o B Br 3 Original Density m lel Finish Scan 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Place the next original and press the Start key Repeat these steps to scan the remaining originals After scanning all originals press Finish Scan to start copying OPERATION GUIDE 4 31 Copying Functions Auto Image Rotation Automatically rotates the image when the sizes of the original and
53. Letter R A4 A4 R B5 B5 R 16K 16K R 1 000 sheets Supported Paper Stapling 90 g m or less Weight Maximum Sheets Ledger Legal Oficio Il 8 5x13 5 A3 B4 8K 25 sheets for Stapling Letter Letter R A4 A4 R 16K 50 sheets Paper weight 90 g m or less Dimensions 25 x 20 63 64 x 40 5 16 W x D x H 634 9 x 533 x 1013 5 mm Weight Approx 58 42 Ibs Approx 26 5 kg 3 000 Sheet Document Finisher option Description Number of Trays 3 trays Paper TrayA Ledger Legal Oficio Il 8 5 13 5 A3 B4 Folio 8K 1 500 sheets Size Non Letter Letter R A4 A4 R B5 16K 3 000 sheets Stapling Tray B Ledger Legal Oficio II 8 5 13 5 A3 B4 Folio 8K 100 sheets Letter Letter R Statement R A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5R B6 R A6 R 16K 16K R 200 sheets Tray C Letter Statement R A4 B5 A5 R B6 R A6 R 16K 50 sheets Supported Paper Stapling 90 g m or less Weight Maximum Sheets Ledger Legal Oficio II 8 5 13 5 A3 B4 Folio 8K 30 sheets for Stapling A4 A4 R B5 Letter Letter R 16K 50 sheets Paper weight 90 g m or less Dimensions 27 1 2 x 22 9 16 x 42 13 16 W x D x H 687 x 573 x 1087mm Weight Approx 121 3 Ibs Approx 55 kg OPERATION GUIDE Appendix 25 Job Separator option Item Description Number of Trays 1 tray Maximum Sheets 100 sheets 80 g m Paper Size Ledger Legal Oficio Il 8 5x13 5
54. OK 9 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 RA Stateless Settings Select whether or not to use RA Stateless The RA Stateless settings are available when selecting On for TCP IP IPv6 The default setting is On Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting Press Next of Pv6 2 3 4 Press Change of RA Stateless 5 Press On or Off of RA Stateless When selecting On IP Address 1 to 5 Stateless appears 6 Press OK 7 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 DHCP IPv6 Settings Select whether or not to use the DHCP IPv6 server The DHCP IPv6 Settings are available when selecting On for TCP IP IPv6 The default setting is On Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting 3 Press Next of Pv6 OPERATION GUIDE 8 65 Default Setting System Menu 4 Press Change of DHCP 5 Press On or Off of DHCP When selecting On IP Address Stateful appears 6 Press OK 7 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machin
55. On and enter the number of jobs in the job log history print by using or the numeric keys have been logged You can enter any number between 1 and 1500 4 Press OK 1 1500 100 I 08 08 2009 10 10 Manual Job Log History Transmission You can also send the job log history to the specified destinations manually Use the procedure below to send the job log history manually 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Report Next of Sending Job Log History and then Execute of Send Job Log History When the confirmation screen appears press Yes The job log history is sent Setting E mail Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending job log histories by e mail Use the procedure below to set the subject 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Report Next of Sending Job Log History and then Change of Subject 3 Enter an e mail subject not more than 60 characters NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 for details on entering characters 4 Check that the entry is correct and press OK 7 12 OPERATION GUIDE Status Job Cancel Pause and Resumption of Jobs Pause resume all printing jobs in printing waiting The procedure for pausing and resuming jobs is explained below 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 Press Pause All Print Jobs on the Printing Jobs Status Status screen Printing is paused All Job No End Date
56. Original Size Sending Size and Zoom Original Size page 5 2 Sending Size and Zoom page 5 5 are related to each other Refer to the following table Original Size and the size you the same different wish to send as are Original Size Specify as Specify as necessary necessary Sending Size Select Same as Select the Original required size Zoom Select 100 Select Auto or Auto NOTE When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size and select the Zoom 100 you can send the image as the actual size No Zoom Use the procedure below to select the size for transmission when sending scanned images 1 Press the Send Key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Original Sending Data Format and then Sending Size Al Ready to send ea 4 Press Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 or Place original 1 Others to select the sending size Sending Size p Ca Standard Same as Ledger Letter im Original Size 5 Press O K f Legal Statement 11x15 Standard 8 5x13 5 OficiolI 100 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 5 4 OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions Zoom Scans the original by automatically zooming it depending on the sending size The table below lists the available options No Zoom to be scanned at actual size Zoomed automatically according to the spe
57. SMB Saving Documents to USB Memory Connecting Cables Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Plug the USB memory Create a shared folder on the destination computer Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys 8 51 Place the originals on the platen Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB 6 22 Sending 3 23 1 Sending Functions 5 1 1 If the destination is not stored in the address book you can send by entering the address directly OPERATION GUIDE vii Administrator tasks As well as sending a FAX via the telephone lines you can also send a FAX via a network To send a FAX It faxes NOTE For more information on setting up and sending a FAX refer to the FAX System S Operation Guide FAX directly FAX without using the Send a FAX froma telephone line computer Internet FAX i FAX Connect the modular cord for the telephone line to this machine Selection of Telephone Line Inch version only Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Install the Network FAX Driver on your computer 1 Loading Paper 2 19 FAX Operation About Network Internet Fax i FAX i Basic 3 1 FAX 9 1 Optional 8 1 Operation lon the FAX System S on the FAX System S lon the FAX System S Operation Guide Operation Guide Operation Guide 1 For more information refer to the Network FAX Driver Operation Guide 2 If the destina
58. aes alee Ge kha eee ae Bae eh eae wee aes oe Appendix 13 Specifications ay 08 sa Kad dag eis Wek aadedaa se bea hes WR ee Ey eal Appendix 21 Glossa teas amas eaa a eee eee ane Peas a aes ue ace Rae a ee amie Gere Appendix 27 TIN SX te emaa ares E os means ah ccd menace ame ce hen anand aCe tel Bare decd aie Sees aid Index 1 OPERATION GUIDE v Quick Guide Be sure to read Precautions for Use before using this machine Administrator tasks You can print via a network or print a PDF file directly from USB memory To make copies To print Simply press the Start key to make e copies You can also fine tune the Laa PS copy settings by changing the paper size adjusting the density etc lt q It prints Copying with Printing Documents Print specific Stored in Removable viaa settings USB Memory network Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Install the printer driver on your computer 1 Loading Paper 2 19 Placing Originals on the Platen 2 30 Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory 6 20 Printing Printing from Applications 3 21 Copying Functions 4 1 Operation 1 For more information refer to the Printer Driver User Guide vi OPERATION GUIDE Administrator tasks To send documents You can send scanned images via a network Or you can also store scanned images in Tm USB memory It sends Send Send to as Folder E mail
59. and remove any paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 4 Pullout cassette 1 and remove the paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 5 Push cassette 1 back in place securely 6 Press the specified position to close left cover 1 Paper Feed Unit Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the paper feed unit 1 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover 1 10 22 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting 2 Remove any paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 3 Open front cover 4 Turn the lower green knob A1 clockwise 5 Remove any paper proceed with the If you cannot remove the paper next step 10 23 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting 6 Pull out paper feed unit A2 7 Open paper feed unit cover A3 and remove any paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 8 Ifthe paper is torn pull paper feed unit A2 all the way out and lift it slightly to remove any paper 9 Remove the paper If you cannot remove the paper proceed with the next step 10 Push paper feed unit A2 back in place and close the front cover 10 24 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting 11 Press the specified position to close left cover 1
60. begins and a copy of the transmitted document is stored in the specified Custom Box 5 30 OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions FTP Encrypted TX This allows you to encrypt documents when you send them If you select On in this option you can then select the encryption method in the basic send screen Use the procedure below to scan and send originals as encrypted files Color Type 1 2 Press the Send Key Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen Press Advanced Setup v and then FTP Encrypted TX Press On Press OK NOTE Click Advanced gt Secure Protocols in the Embedded Web Server Be sure that SSL of Secure Protocol Settings is On and one or more effective encryption are selected in Clientside Settings For details refer to the Embedded Web Server Operation Guide This sets the color type when you send color documents The table below shows the available settings Match the color reproduction space between sRGB compatible systems Selecting RGB displays the color profile values set on the machine Send Color Type i Specify the color type to send color images Profile RGB FINE 1 Cancel la ok 08 08 2009 10 10 1 2 3 4 Press System Menu key Press Send and Change of Color Type Select RGB or SRGB Press OK OPERATION GUIDE 5 31 Sending Functions About Color Profiles The color scann
61. default login user name and password 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting and Check of Each Job Accounting HSE n nr 5 Select the account to check the count i Maintain a separate counter for each account department at d NOTE Select Name or ID from the Sort pull down Saas menu to sort the account names Search ID Press Search Name or Search ID to search by other Account account name or account ID 6 Press Detail 08 08 2009 10 10 11 24 OPERATION GUIDE Management 7 Press Check at the function to check the count ae ee The results will be displayed gt FAX Transmission Pages FAX Transmission Time 8 Confirm the count and press Close r 2 20 0 00 10 9 Press Execute of Counter Reset to reset the counter 10 Press Yes on the screen to confirm the reset The Counter Reset Execute 7 FE counter will be reset 08 08 2009 10 10 Counting by Paper Size This counts the number of pages by paper size e g Letter NOTE Paper size is available in five types 1 to 5 These types are specified in accounting reports Refer to Printing an Accounting Report on page 11 26 In addition to paper size media type can also be specified e g count the letter size color paper used If no media type is specified usage is counted for all media types of that size Use the procedure below to count the number of pages 1 Press the System Menu key
62. delete and press Open NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password 3 Select the document you wish to delete by checking the checkbox The document is marked with a checkmark NOTE Delete is disabled until a document is selected To deselect press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark 4 Press Delete The delete confirmation screen appears 5 Press Yes The document is deleted OPERATION GUIDE 6 11 Document Box Using a Job Box Private Print Stored Job Box Private Print Stored Job Box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Private Print Stored Job Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Private Print or Stored Job using the printer driver Printing a Document in Private Print Stored Job Box You can print documents stored in a Private Print Stored Job box Use the procedure below to print a document 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Job Box 3 Select Private Print Stored Job and press Open Job Box 4 a al of the document to print and TS job Box 5 Select the document and press Print NOTE If a password is set for the Custom Box in advance enter the correct password J aae Tuy 1u 2000 USAD OU MD CJ 3File 10 10 2008 09 50 36 MB LJ 4File 10 10 2008 09 55 21 MB LJ 5File 10 10 2008 10 00 4 Close Status 08 08
63. detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 HTTP Security Setup Select the HTTP security level This setup is available when SSL is On The default setting is HTTPS Only OPERATION GUIDE 8 69 Default Setting System Menu NOTE HTTP must be set to On in Protocol Detail on page 8 66 Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network Next of Secure Protocol and then Change of HTTPS Security 3 Press HTTP or HTTPS or HTTPS Only 4 Press OK 5 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 LDAP Security Setup Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server This setup is available when SSL is On The default setting is Off NOTE LDAP must be set to On in Protocol Detail on page 8 66 The table below shows the available settings Item Description Off Do not use security employed by the LDAP server LDAP over SSL Use implicit mode for data communication The server provides services using the LDAP over SSL port 636 Encryption is applied to any data communication using this port LDAPv3 TLS Use explicit mode for data communication Select this if the server supports the start TLS command This uses the same port 389 as LDAP
64. document processor or on the platen CustomiBo 3 Press Custom Box select the box where the l document will be stored and then press Store File NOTE The Custom Box to store a file needs to be created in advance If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password Register Edit Box 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Select the type of originals scanning density etc as necessary 5 Press the Start key The original is scanned and the data is stored in the specified Custom Box NOTE Enter up to 64 characters as the file name 6 4 OPERATION GUIDE Document Box Printing Documents The procedure for printing documents in a custom box is explained below 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Custom Box select the box containing the document you want to print and press Open NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password 3 Select the document you wish to print by checking ne the checkbox 10 10 2008 09 40 21 MB Search Name The document is marked with a checkmark Ga 00C v 2 0404200710574511 10 10 2008 09 50 21 MB 00c v E 0404200710574521 10 10 2008 10 00 21 MB a NOTE To deselect press the checkbox again and a remove the checkmark Vv Preview asm Join Move Copy Delete Store File 4 Press P ri n t d Close 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Set the paper selection duplex prin
65. er lao are listed by selecting Name or No from the Sort Caneel Ja ox S pull down menu 08 08 2009 10 10 NOTE To cancel the selection press the check box and remove the checkmark For details on the external address book refer to Embedded Web Server Operation Guide 3 Press OK to register the selected destination in the destination list NOTE To delete a destination in the list select the destination and press Delete 3 30 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Destination Search Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched Advanced search by type or by initial letter is also available iE Address Book Addr Book Address Book Dest No Type Name Detail 0001 ABCD abcd efg com V 0002 Tuvw tuvw xyz com Groupi _ 0004 Group2 J os Group3 D e 4 pama er re ce jha Cancel J el Register Edit Address Book Detail OK 08 08 2009 10 10 Search type Subjects searched Search by name Search by registered name Search by address Search by registered address number number Advanced search Advanced search by initial letter of registered name by initial letter Advanced search Advanced search by type of registered destination by destination E mail Folder SMB F TP FAX i FAX or Group FAX Only when the optional fax kit is installed i FAX Only wh
66. extracting Pages Can change the page layout except extracting the pages of the PDF file Any except extracting Pages Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of the PDF file Only displayed when Acrobat 5 0 and later is selected in Compatibility Only displayed when Acrobat 4 0 and later is selected in Compatibility 13 From Copying of Text Images Others select Disable or Enable OPERATION GUIDE 5 15 Sending Functions The table below shows the available settings Disable Prohibit the copying of text and objects on the PDF file Enable Can copy text and objects on the PDF file 14 Press OK three times to return to Original Sending Data Format 15 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending Image Quality Select image quality suitable to the type of original The table below shows the quality options Item Detail Text Photo Text and photos together Photo For photos taken with a camera Text Only text no photos for OCR For documents to be read by OCR i This function is only available for black and white mode Use the procedure below to select the quality when sending scanned originals 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality and then Original Image a Ready to send Destination 4 Select the original image Place original Origin 5 Press
67. forget your password In this event access the machine using administrator privileges and overwrite your box password 3 Select the box containing the document you want to work with and press Open The document list screen appears You can use this screen for tasks such as printing and sending documents For more information on using the document list refer to Document List on page 3 37 NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password OPERATION GUIDE 3 35 3 36 Basic Operation Custom Box List The box list shows the registered custom boxes The custom boxes can be listed by box number or by box name You can manipulate the list in a range of ways as shown below Listing the boxes by number in Listing the boxes by name in ascending descending order alphabetical order 0001 Search Name Search No Register Edit 1 Box 0002 jj 0002 Box 0003 gj 0003 Box Store File Detail Open i Ll ea Rei een AX Box Custom Box Status 08 08 2009 10 10 Saves the document in the selected box Registers new boxes and checks modifies or deletes box information Opens the selected box Displays the details for the selected box OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Document List The document list is a list of the documents stored in the custom box Documents can be listed either by name or as th
68. from your PC NOTE Installation on Windows XP Windows 2000 Server 2003 and Windows Vista must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep Wake the device from Sleep before continuing See Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 9 OPERATION GUIDE 2 15 Preparation before Use Embedded Web Server Settings for E mail Embedded Web Server is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine and changing the settings for security network printing E mail transmission and advanced networking NOTE Here information on the FAX settings has been omitted For more information on using the FAX refer to the Fax Kit Operation Guide The procedure for accessing Embedded Web Server is explained below 1 2 Launch your Web browser In the Address or Location bar enter the machine s IP address E g http 192 168 48 21 The web page displays basic information about the machine and Embedded Web Server as well as their current status Addres B http 192 168 48 21 Start Basic Printer Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen The values for each category must be set separately If restrictions have been set for Embedded Web Server enter the correct user name and password to access pages other than the startup page For details refer to the Embedded Web Server Operation Guide 2
69. information Use the procedure below 1 Press Register Edit Box in the box list screen N Highlight the box whose details you wish to check or edit and press Detail Edit Document Box Removable Memory Register Edit Box b A Nama Liced Area NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password ia enter the correct password 3 Check the box details Box No 0001 pi To edit details press Change of the detail you Box Name Usage Restriction wish to edit Edit the detail as desired and press SALES 21 MB OK Box Password E Overwrite Setting Permit Auto File Deletion 30 day s Free Space Delete after Printed 30 GB Off Cancel el Register 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Ifyou have changed the details press Register and then press Yes in the confirmation screen If you did not change the details press No 5 Press Close The display returns to the default Document Box screen 3 38 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Previewing Documents Checking Document Details You can use this function to preview the documents stored in a document box or display the document details for checking Use the procedure below 1 Select highlight a document to preview and then press Preview or Detail 2 Preview the document or check the document details The operations available in the preview screen are shown below When you have zoomed in yo
70. ki Authentication Select Local Authentication or Network Authentication Select Off to disable user login administration If you select Network Authentication enter the host name 62 characters or less and domain name 256 characters or less for the Authentication Server Select NTLM or Kerberos as the server type Expansion Authentication Server Type NTLM Kerberos cancel a ok 08 08 2009 10 10 NOTE If the login user name and password are rejected check the following settings e Network Authentication setting of the machine e User property of the Authentication Server e Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine login with any administrator registered in the local user list and correct the settings If the server type is Kerberos only domain names entered in uppercase will be recognized 6 Press OK Login Logout Once you enable user login administration a login user name and password entry screen appears each time you use this machine Login Use the procedure below to login 1 If the screen below appears during the operations press Login User Name Enter login user name and password Login to Local y Login Press Keys to enter the login data using the numeric keys a i 2 Enter the login user name and press OK Password Keys ICCard Lo
71. kit is installed Use the procedure below to select the output tray 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings and then Next of Paper Output 3 Press Change of Copy Custom Box Printer or FAX Port 1 or FAX Port 2 NOTE FAX Port 1 appears when the optional fax kit is installed If you have 2 optional fax kits installed Fax Port 2 appears You can specify the output tray for the second kit Dual FAX 4 Select Output Tray For Finisher Tray Tray B Tray C or Tray 1 to Tray 7 select Face Up print surface up or Face Down print surface down as the paper orientation at output 5 Press OK When selecting Face Up print surface up as the paper orientation at output press Page Order with Face Up and then select the order of the output pages from Ascending or Descending NOTE Selecting Descending accelerates the starting time of copying 7 When changing the output tray of Copy Custom Box move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key 8 14 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Orientation Confirmation Select whether to display a screen for selecting the orientation of the originals to be placed on the platen when using the following functions For more information refer to page 4 10 for Original Orientation e Duplex Memo mode e Margin Centering originals e Page numbering e Border erase e Booklets e Combine mode e Staple
72. label shown below is attached on the right side of the machine CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT KLASSE 1 LASER PRODUKT OPERATION GUIDE XV Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power Caution The power plug is the main isolation device Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source VORSICHT Der Netzstecker ist die Hauptisoliervorrichtung Die anderen Schalter auf dem Ger t sind nur Funktionsschalter und k nnen nicht verwendet werden um den StromfluB im Ger t zu unterbrechen DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY TO 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EEC 93 68 EEC 1999 5 EC and 2005 32 EC We declare under our sole responsibility that the product to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the following specifications EN55024 EN55022 Class B EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 EN60950 1 EN60825 1 EN300 330 1 EN300 330 2 EN62301 Radio Frequency Transmitter This machine contains the transmitter module We the manufacturer hereby declare that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Radio Tag Technology In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted NOTE Product marked with the Crossed out Wheeled Bin Symbol in
73. left side of the paper feeder for use in clearing paper jams In addition to the printer s cassettes you can also install an optional 3 000 sheet paper feeder capable of holding up to 3 000 sheets of A4 or B5 paper NOTE The 3 000 sheet paper feeder features a removable cover on the left side of the feeder left cover 4 for removing paper when a paper jam occurs The document finisher holds a large quantity of finished copies The finisher offers a convenient means of sorting Sorted finished copies may also be stapled For further details refer to the document finisher Operation Guide This is a large capacity document finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple copies of a printout into individual copies It can also staple or hole punch optional the offset printouts For details refer to the 3 000 Sheet Document Finisher Operation Guide A mail box and folding unit are also available as options Appendix 4 OPERATION GUIDE Built in Finisher The built in finisher holds a large quantity of finished prints The finisher offers a convenient means of sorting Sorted finished prints may also be stapled 1 Finisher tray 2 Finisher process tray The finisher tray serves as an output tray of sorted prints Extend the auxiliary tray to sort Ledger Legal Letter Letter R A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 or Folio prints Adding Staples 1 Pull to open the
74. mail You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached Setting the destination Set the destination to which job log histories are sent Use the procedure below to set the destination 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Report Next of Sending Job Log History and then Change of Destination 3 To enter a new e mail address press E mail Address Entry Press E mail Address enter the destination e mail address and then press OK T 4 To setan address from the address book press E mail Address Book Press Address Book Select the destination from the address book and press OK NOTE For information on specifying destinations refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 30 The selected e mail addresses is displayed NOTE You can view information on the selected destinations by pressing Detail 5 Press OK Automatic Job Log History Transmission This function automatically sends the job log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs has been logged Use the procedure below to set automatic job log history transmission 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Report Next of Sending Job Log History and then Change of Auto Sending OPERATION GUIDE 7 11 Status Job Cancel Report Auto Sending i Send job log history to the specified destination after a set number of jobs Press
75. non standard sizes and custom sizes ISO B5 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C4 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 and Custom 1 to 4 Enter the size not included in the standard sizes 1 and a Inch models Horizontal 5 83 to 17 in 0 01 increments Vertical 3 86 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models Vertical 98 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments Horizontal 148 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Plain 105 g m or less Transparency Rough Vellum 64 g m or less Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick 91 g m or more Envelope High Quality Custom 1 to 8 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper sizes Custom 1 to 4 refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8 4 ii The input units can be changed in the System menu Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8 11 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8 refer to Paper Weight on page 8 7 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 8 10 NOTE You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default refer to Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray on page 8 6
76. of JPEG TIFF Print 3 Select the default for Fit to Paper Size Image Resolution or Fit to Print Resolution 4 Press OK XPS Fit to Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file Use the procedure below to set the default XPS Fit to Page settings 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults Press wv twice and Change of XPS Fit to Page Select Off or On for the default Press OK OPERATION GUIDE 8 25 Default Setting System Menu Copy Settings The following settings are available for copying functions Paper Selection 8 26 Auto Paper Selection 8 26 Auto Priority 8 27 Reserve Next Priority 8 27 Preset Limit 8 27 Quick Setup Registration 8 28 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Paper Selection Set the default paper selection The table below shows the available settings Item Description Auto Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as originals Default Paper Source Select paper source set by Default Paper Source refer to page 8 9 Use the procedure below to set the default paper selection 1 a fF Q N Press the System Menu key Press Copy and Change of Paper Selection Press Auto or Default Paper Source Press O
77. of original size Standard Sizes 1 Detail Select from automatic detection and standard sizes Inch models Auto Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement Statement R 8 5 13 5 Oficio Il R 11x15 Metric models Auto A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 A5 R B6 B6 R A6 R Folio Standard Sizes 2 Select from standard sizes except Standard Sizes 1 Inch models A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 A5 R B6 B6 R A6 R Folio 8K 16 K 16K R Metric models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio II R 11x15 8K 16K 16K R Others Select from Hagaki and Custom Original Size Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Custom 1 to 4 Size Entry Enter the size that is not indicated in Standard Sizes 1 and 2 Inch models Horizontal 2 to 17 in 0 01 increments Vertical 2 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models Horizontal 50 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Vertical 50 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments id Regarding the setting method of Custom Original Size Custom 1 to 4 refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8 4 ii The input units can be changed in the System menu Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8 11 Use the procedure below to select the original size when sending scanned images 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Original Sending Data Format and then Original Size 5 2 OPERATIO
78. original 1 5 Press OK Select scanning color Select Auto Color to automatically send color originals in full color and black amp white originals in black amp white Auto Color Auto Color Color Gray Color B amp W ZI lal Paper Grayscale Black amp White Add Shortcut Cancel 4 OK 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending OPERATION GUIDE 5 21 Sending Functions Continuous Scan When the multi page originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then sent as one job With this function originals can be scanned one after another until you press Scan Finish Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning e Original Size selection e Original Orientation e 1 sided 2 sided selection Scan density e Image quality Scan resolution e Color selection e Sending Size selection Zoom e Border Erase The procedure for using continuous scanning when sending scanned images is explained below 1 Press the Send key 2 Press Advanced Setup and then Continuous Scan a Ready to send ae 3 Press On Continuous Scan is selected Place original 1 Continuous Scan 4 Press OK il Scan a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job Settings can be changed during scanning B El
79. originals Border erase Combine mode Memo mode Page numbering Booklets Stapling Punch optional feature If On is selected as the Orientation Confirmation on page 8 15 setting in the System Menu the selection screen for original orientation appears when you select any of the above functions When placing originals on the platen Original Top Edge Top Top Edge Left When placing originals on the optional document processor Original Top Edge Top Top Edge Left NOTE To change the default setting for the original orientation refer to Original Orientation on page 8 15 4 10 OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Org Paper Finishing and then Original Orientation Ready to copy 4 Select Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left as the way the original is oriented Original Orientation 4 Select the orientation of the 5 P O K i original document s top edge ress i Place original Top Edge Top jez Edge Left J Add Shortcut Cancel d OK 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Press the Start key to start copying OPERATION GUIDE 4 11 Cop
80. placing the originals Is the paper loaded correctly Check the position of the paper width guides Paper often jams Is the paper loaded correctly Load the paper correctly Is the paper of the supported type Is it in good condition Remove the paper turn it over and reload it Is the paper curled folded or wrinkled Replace the paper with new paper Are there any loose scraps or jammed paper in the machine Remove any jammed paper OPERATION GUIDE 10 3 Troubleshooting Symptom Printouts from the document processor have black lines Checkpoints Is the slit glass dirty Corrective Actions Clean the slit glass Reference Page Printouts are wrinkled Is the paper separator of the paper feed unit dirty Clean the paper separator Is the paper damp Replace the paper with new paper Is the paper set in a proper orientation Change the orientation in which the paper is positioned Cannot print Is the machine plugged in Plug the power cord into an AC outlet Is the machine powered on Turn on the main power switch Is the printer cable connected Connect the correct printer cable securely Was the machine powered on before the printer cable was connected Power on the machine after connecting the printer cable Is Press Status Key displayed at the top of the screen Press the Sta
81. related points CAUTION Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage A may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points Symbols The A symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings Specific points of attention are indicated inside the symbol AN General warning AN Warning of danger of electrical shock A Warning of high temperature The Q symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions Specifics of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol S Warning of prohibited action Q Disassembly prohibited The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol Q Alert of required action Z Remove the power plug from the outlet Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are illegible or if the guide itself is missing fee required NOTE An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function OPERATION GUIDE i Contents Contents Quick Guide 222i accaeerdeii die eedecal daseredbasiade
82. selected from the list or entered at each time SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol A protocol for E mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as well as for sending mail from clients to their servers Status Page The page lists machine conditions such as the memory capacity total number of prints and scans and paper source settings Subnet Mask The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0 The number of bits in the prefix indicates the length of the network address The term prefix refers to something added to the beginning and in this context indicates the first section of the IP address When an IP address is written the length of the network address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash For example 24 in the address 133 210 2 0 24 In this way 133 210 2 0 24 denotes the IP address 133 210 2 0 with a 24 bit prefix network section This new network address section originally part of the host address made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address When you enter the subnet mask be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each
83. settings refer to the Network Setup on 8 64 TCP IP IPv4 Setup 2 12 e AppleTalk Setup 2 14 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter a login user name and password and press Login Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password TCP IP IPv4 Setup by Entering IP Addresses Set up TCP IP to connect to the Windows network Set the IP addresses subnet masks and gateway addresses The default settings are TCP IP Protocol On DHCP On Bonjour Off Auto IP On NOTE Prior to the IP address entries obtain permission from the network administrator Use the procedure below Press the System Menu key N Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting Press Change of TCP IP Press On and then press OK Press Change of IPv4 Press DHCP System IPv4 i Set TCP IP IPv4 aes Subnet Mask 2000 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 on Off On DHCP Bonjour Auto IP Cancel a OK 08 08 2009 10 10 7 Press Off of DHCP and then press OK 8 Press Bonjour 2 12 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use 9 Press Off of Bonjour and then press OK 10 Press IP Address and enter the address using the numeric keys
84. size paper NOTE This function is available regardless of whether originals have the same width or not The table below shows the finished document sizes for the different original size options Option Description Mixed Size Copies Originals are detected individually for size and copied to the same size paper as originals Same Size Copies Originals are all copied to the same size paper Use the procedure below to copy mixed size originals 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place originals on the document processor IMPORTANT When placing originals of different widths be sure to flush them against the document width guide toward the back of the machine 3 Press Org Paper Finishing and then Mixed Size Originals Ready to copy 4 Select Mixed Size Copies or Same Size Copies E as finish size Mixed Size Originals Tee Original Width 5 Select the combination of originals from Same a Width and Different Width ase cot When Same Size Copies is selected select Long ea Edge Left or Short Edge Left as the first original A orientation Long Edge Short Edge i 6 Press OK Add Shortcut Cancel a ok 08 08 2009 10 10 7 Press the Start key to start copying OPERATION GUIDE 4 9 Copying Functions Original Orientation Select the original orientation to use the following functions Zoom XY Zoom Duplex Margin Centering
85. stapler front cover OPERATION GUIDE Appendix 5 2 Pull out the staple holder 3 Remove the empty staple case from the staple holder 4 Holding the staple holder in your left hand and a new staple case in your right hand insert the staple case into the staple holder in the direction of the arrow 5 Insert the staple case fully as far as it will go Pull to remove the paper tape wound on the staple case Appendix 6 OPERATION GUIDE 6 Insert the staple holder into the slot of the staple unit again When fully inserted the staple holder locks with a clicking sound 1 Pull out the staple holder referring to steps 1 and 2 of Adding Staples 2 Holding the knob A on the face plate of the staple holder lift the face plate 3 Clear the staple jammed in the cartridge end staple loaded side 4 Lower the face plate of the staple holder 5 Insert the face plate back in place When fully inserted the face plate locks with a clicking sound OPERATION GUIDE Appendix 7 Job Separator Key Counter Inserting the Key Counter 6 After lifting the staple unit slightly lower it and insert it again into its place 7 Close the stapler front cover Separate paper according to output tray for easier sorting Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs Or specify as the default output tray
86. the Internet Browser 0 00 cece teeta 3 49 4 Copying Functions Onga SZE errar errip er eane e aa e a e eieaa eA ei 4 2 Paper Selection n n ananuna aaa 4 4 ii OPERATION GUIDE Contents Mixed Sized Originals 2 eee 4 7 Original Orientation 25 0 660006 800 eee Oe ee ee eee ee ee ee 4 10 Output Destination lt serei iaaa 4a ed ena eed tate da ea ee eee ea Reg ek 4 12 Combine Mode 0 000 cece tenet eee eee 4 13 Margin Centering Mode 0000 cette ae 4 15 Border Erase pecar eaa eea eee ee teens 4 17 Booklet from Sheets 000 cc eee ete 4 19 Cover Modes 2cv4 0040 paaa a Ce bam ace EE Sd one ae eR AG RE Rael Rae 4 21 Form Overlay sic ce seed dar arrene aaaea det ped bad apenas Sebel ee wee 4 22 Page NUMBING wie a cache eda renee EEEE PRASE EE EORR weed eee ee hee 4 23 Memo Mode 2c fesagai naea Beh a PY ER Ae CRAG Rae Vea Gy dae ae ea Sees a 4 25 Image Repeat Double Copy 0 0 0 eee 4 27 6 0 cd 6 reena na icai aieas ai iaa a a a a eee 4 29 Sharpness Adjust errores cadad rint dee ETNEN eee eee ee Ree nee ee ee 4 30 Continuous SCaliis anaa daa be eed eee Sa gaee Wea a A EWES CEE Re ee 4 31 Auto Image Rotation 22 2 464 24d es eee eed eee ee Re eee Eee ee Co ENEA Oe 4 32 Negative Mage ns ssiebbodesnd debe seedepeg dane Oped bad Meee ethos deb ala E ees 4 32 Mirror Image sie eb sive are ay cen sy Shee ae ged eee ene eee Pee ad ewes 4 33 Job Finish Notice se4
87. the confirmation screen Copying NOTE rr errr If Reserve Next Priority refer to page 8 27 is set to canner Setting rinter Setting Scanned Pages Copies Off 2 _ 2 24 Letter Plain ake The Copying screen appears in the touch panel during gt 100 z gt 2 sided printing gt 2 sided Collate a 1 Press the Stop key or Cancel Top Tray C PEREA The current print job is cancelled 08 08 2009 10 10 3 42 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Quick Setup Screen In the initial screen for copying and sending the screen which appears immediately after the Copy or Send key is first pressed after power on important and generally often used functions are registered from among the versatile functions of this machine This initial screen is called Quick Setup Screen Registration of functions in the Quick Setup Screen can be adjusted to suit your work environment for better efficiency Functions Available for Registration in the Quick Setup Screen Default registrations and the functions available for registration are as follows Function Copying Default Registration Paper Selection Zoom Density Duplex Combine Staple Punch Functions Available for Registration Paper Selection Zoom Density Duplex Combine Staple Punch Original Orientation Collate Offset Original Image Original Size Continuous Scan Sending Zoom Scan Resol
88. the destination and press the Start key to start sending OPERATION GUIDE 5 19 Sending Functions Background Density Adjustment Lightens the background of the colored original when it is too dark NOTE You cannot adjust the background density if you selected Black amp White in Color Grayscale Black and White Selection see page 5 21 Use the procedure below to set the background density when sending scanned images Destination 4 Ready to send Place original Background Density Adj A TATA AAS a 08 08 2009 10 10 1 Press the Send key Place the originals on the platen Press Color Image Quality and then Background Density Adj Press On and press 1 to 5 Lighter Darker to adjust the background density Press OK 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 5 20 OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions Color Grayscale Black and White Selection This feature allows you to select the color mode used for scanning when sending images You can select from Auto Color Gray Auto Color B amp W Full Color Grayscale or Black amp White Use the procedure below to select the color mode when sending scanned images 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality and then Color Selection Al Ready to send poe 4 Select the color mode to be used for scanning Place
89. the entire stack risen 3 Raise the right and left hands alternately to create a gap and feed air between the paper 4 Finally align the paper on a level flat table If the paper is curled or folded straighten it before loading Paper that is curled or folded may cause a jam CAUTION If you copy onto used paper paper already used for copying do not use paper that is stapled or clipped together This may damage the machine or cause poor image quality NOTE If printouts are curled or not neatly stapled turn the stack in the cassette upside down Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the paper storage bag If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag NOTE If you use special paper such as letterhead paper with holes or paper with pre prints like logo or company name refer to the Paper on Appendix 13 OPERATION GUIDE 2 19 Preparation before Use Loading Paper in the Cassettes The 2 standard cassettes will each hold plain paper recycled paper or color paper Cassette holds up to 500 sheets 80 g m The following paper sizes are supported Ledger Legal Oficio Il 8 5x13 5 Letter Letter R Statement A3 B4 A4 A
90. the loaded paper matches but the orientations are different The images will be rotated 90 counter clockwise prior to copying NOTE To set Auto Image Rotation as the default mode refer to Auto Image Rotation on page 8 21 The procedure for making copies using Auto Image Rotation is explained below 1 2 Negative Image Inverts black and white portions of the image for printing Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup and then Auto Image Rotation Press On to select Auto Image Rotation Press OK Press the Start key to start copying NOTE This function is only available for black and white copy mode Use the procedure below to make negative image copies 1 2 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup and then Negative Image Press On to select Negative Image Press OK Press the Start key to start copying 4 32 OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Mirror Image Copies the mirrored image of the original NOTE This function is only available for black and white copy mode Use the procedure below to make mirror image copies Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup and then Mirror Image Press On to select Mirror Image Press OK ao oa fF WO N Press the Start key to start copying OPERATION GUIDE 4 33 Copying Functions Jo
91. the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network and then Change of NetWare 3 Press On 4 Press the key for the frame type you want to use OPERATION GUIDE 8 67 Default Setting System Menu 5 Press OK 6 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 AppleTalk Setup Select the Apple Talk network connection Refer to Apple Talk Setup on page 2 14 about the procedures WSD Scan Setup Select whether or not to use WSD Scan The default setting is On Use the procedure below Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then Change of WSD Scan Press On or Off Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 WSD Print Setup Select whether or not to use WSD Print The default setting is On Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network and then Change of WSD Print 3 Press On or Off 4 Press OK 5 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 8 68 OPERATION GUIDE
92. the setting a confirmation screen appears Press Yes 8 28 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Sending Settings The sending settings allow you to specify the following sending function options e Quick Setup Registration 8 29 e Destination Check before Send 8 30 e Color Type 8 30 Entry Check for New Destination 8 31 Setting the Default Send Screen 8 31 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Quick Setup Registration Select the sending functions to be registered for Quick Setup Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary Six items in the following options are available Original Size 2 sided Book Original Sending Size Original Orientation File Format Density GE Original Image Scan Resolution FAX TX Resolution Color Selection Zoom Continuous Scan Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Send and Next of Quick Setup Registration 3 Press Change of the function to be registered in Quick Setup 4 Select a key 1 6 allocated on the Quick Setup Registration screen Press Off to delete a key from the Quick Setup 5 Press OK If you overwrite the setting a confirmation screen appears Press Yes OPERATION GUIDE 8 29 Default Setting System Menu De
93. then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Select the application you want to check the details of and press Detail You can now view detailed information on the selected application 8 76 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Accessibility Display Enlarged Touch Panel Display Touch panel characters and key displays can be enlarged Use the numeric keys to select items and proceed to the next screen NOTE Accessibility can be used only with Copying and Sending registered on the Quick Setup screen To set functions other than those displayed in the accessibility screens you must return to the original display Press the Accessibility Display key again Press the Accessibility Display key when in the Copy Accessibility or Send i e the Copy or Send key indicator is On Display F Ready to copy Copies Enlarged keys or characters appear on the touch panel 1 Operation can also be made by pressing any numeric key corresponding to the number displayed e g Press the 2 key to adjust zoom Follow the instructions on the screen for subsequent operations GE iS 08 08 2009 10 10 OPERATION GUIDE 8 77 Default Setting System Menu 8 78 OPERATION GUIDE 9 Maintenance This chapter describes cleaning and toner replacement KASEI anea e Toner Container and W
94. then resumes PostScript error has occurred The job is canceled Press End Internal error has occurred Make a note of the error code displayed on the touch panel Turn off the machine unplug the power cord and contact your Service Representative Machine failure Maximum number of scanned pages Is the acceptable scanning count exceeded Only one copy of the scanned pages is available Press Continue to print send or store the scanned pages Press Cancel to cancel printing sending or storing 10 8 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting Error Message Memory is full Checkpoints Corrective Actions Unable to continue the job as the memory is used up Press Continue to print the scanned pages The print job cannot be processed completely Press Cancel to cancel the job Reference Page The process cannot be performed due to insufficient memory If only End is available press End The job will be canceled Paper jam If a paper jam occurs the machine will stop and the location of the jam will be indicated on the touch panel Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to remove the jammed paper Print overrun Warning Low printer memory The job was paused Press Continue to re start the job Removable memory error This job is canceled Press End Removable memory is full This job is canceled Press End Repla
95. thick paper fed from the different paper source than the regular one The following two options are available Paper for the cover is supplied from the multi purpose tray To feed the cover paper from the cassette refer to Paper Source for Cover Paper on page 8 10 Type of Cover Description Front Cover First page of the originals is copied on a different paper Front and Back First page and last page of the originals are Covers copied on different paper The procedure for using Cover mode copying is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Layout Edit and then Cover Ready to copy Copies 4 Press Front Cover or Front and Back Covers 5 Press OK li Print cover pages on the different type of paper using a different paper source Select either Front Cover or Front and Back Covers Set paper source for cover in System Menu E E o Front Cover Front and Back Covers Add Shortcut 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Press the Start key Copying begins If the originals are placed on the platen consecutively replace each original after pressing the Start key After scanning all originals press Finish Scan to start copying OPERATION GUIDE 4 21 Copying Functions Form Overlay Copy the original images onto the form Once you scan and register the form the form is overlaid onto the K b gt original You can also use a form
96. this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password Press Next of Job Accounting Setting Next of Default Setting and then Change of Apply Limit Select Immediately Subsequently or Alert Only Press OK 11 20 OPERATION GUIDE Management Default Counter Limit When you add a new account you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used You can set any number from 1 to 9 999 999 in 1 sheet increments The items that can be set differ depending on whether Split or Total is selected for Managing the Copier Printer Counts on page 11 18 Available Settings Split selected for Copier Printer Count Item Detail Copy Restriction Total Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for copying Print Restriction Total Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for printing Scan Restriction Others Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning excludes copying FAX TX Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed Total selected for Copier Printer Count Print Restriction Total Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for copying and printing Scan Restriction Others Sets t
97. to 17 or 148 to 432 mm 20 Transparency OHP film Letter Letter R A4 A4 R 25 OPERATION GUIDE Appendix 13 Basic Paper Specifications This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular dry copiers and page printers such as laser printers It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix Be careful when choosing paper Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled Supported Paper Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output Basic Paper Specifications The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine Refer to the subsequent sections for further details Criteria Specifications Weight Cassettes 60 to 105 g m Multi purpose tray 45 to 160 g m Thickness 0 086 to 0 110 mm Dimensional accuracy 0 7 mm Squareness of corners 90 0 2 Moisture content 4 to 6 Grain direction Long grain paper supply direction Pulp content 80 or more NOTE Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications shown below such as moisture or pulp content For this reason we recommend purchasing a small amount of recycled p
98. to 30 originals of different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time Supported Combinations of Originals Originals of the Same Width The supported combinations of originals are as follows Ledger and Letter A3 and A4 4 Letter A4 Ledger and Letter R Folio and A4 R B4 and B5 IS 2 i alll on OPERATION GUIDE 4 7 Copying Functions Originals of Different Widths Place all originals of different widths The supported combinations of originals are as follows NOTE When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination Folio A4 R and B5 R make sure to set the System Menu key gt Common Settings gt Original Paper Settings gt Original Auto Detect to On for Folio For more information refer to Automatic Detection of Originals Available for metric models only on page 8 9 A3 B4 A4 and B5 ike D i lll B4 A4 R and B5 Folio A4 R and B5 R 4 8 OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Selecting How to Copy Originals Select whether you wish to create individual copies on different size paper matching the original sizes or to produce all copies on the same
99. type of the paper loaded in the cassette refer to Original Paper Settings on page 8 4 Selecting the Cassette Use the procedure below to select the paper supply cassette Ready to copy Gai Paper Selection Place original Add Shortcut 08 08 2009 10 10 1 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Org Paper Finishing and then Paper Selection Press the key of the paper source corresponding to the required paper size The cassette in which the paper is loaded is selected If Auto is selected the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically Press OK Press the Start key to start copying OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Selecting the Multi Purpose Tray Change the paper size and media type The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below Category Standard Sizes 1 How to Select Choose from the standard size Inch models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il and Executive Metric models A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R B6 B6 R A6 R and Folio Standard Sizes 2 Choose from the standard sizes not included in the Standard Sizes 1 Inch models A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R B6 R A6 R Folio 8K 16K and 16K R Metric models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il Executive 8K 16K and 16K R Others Choose from
100. using other than a plain paper specify the media type Item Description Auto Paper size is automatically detected and selected Select whether the paper is in Metric size or in Inch size Standard Select from the standard sizes Selectable paper sizes Sizes 1 are as follows Inch size Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Executive 8 5x13 5 and Oficio II Metric size A3 A4 R A4 A5 R A6 R B4 R B5 R B5 B6 R and Folio Standard Select from the standard sizes not included in Standard Sizes 2 Sizes 1 Selectable paper sizes are as follows Inch size A3 A4 R A4 A5 R A6 R B4 R B5 R B5 B6 R Folio 8K 16K R and 16K Metric size Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Executive 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il 8K 16K R and 16K Others Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes Selectable paper sizes are as follows ISO B5 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C4 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 Enter the size not included in the standard size Selectable paper sizes are as follows Inch size X Horizontal 5 83 17 in 0 01 increments Y Vertical 3 86 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric size X Horizontal 148 432 mm in 1mm increments Y Vertical 98 297 mm in 1mm increments Media Type Selectable media types are as follows Plain 105g m o
101. with a new one 3 Enter the shortcut name and press Register to add the shortcut Follow the steps as below to change shortcut number name or delete shortcut In the setup screen of each function press Add Shortcut in the bottom of the screen Press Edit and press the keys corresponding to the shortcut number 01 to 06 to change or delete To edit a shortcut press Change to change the shortcut button number and name and press OK and then Register Choose Yes in the confirmation screen to change the shortcut To delete the shortcut press Delete this Shortcut Choose Yes in the confirmation screen to delete the shortcut 3 48 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Using the Internet Browser This section explains how to use the Internet browser NOTE To use the internet browser internet browser must be set to On in nternet Browser Setting on page 8 58 Launching and Exiting the Browser Use the procedure below to launch and exit the Internet browser 1 Press the Application key The application list screen appears 2 Press Internet Browser The Internet browser starts up Internet Browser 08 08 2009 10 10 3 Use the browser screen to browse web pages For information on how to use the browser screen refer to Using the Browser Screen on page 3 50 4 To exit the browser press X Close and then press Yes in the exit confirmation screen The application list s
102. 0 3 000 sheet document finisher Appendix 4 3 000 sheet paper feeder Appendix 4 A Accessibility 8 77 Appendix 27 Adjusting Density 5 17 Auto 3 7 Manual 3 7 Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle 2 10 Adjustment Maintenance 8 42 Auto Color Correction 8 45 Color Calibration Cycle 8 46 Copy Density Adjustment 8 42 Correcting Fine Black Lines 8 44 Display Brightness 8 44 Drum Refresh 8 43 Gray Adjustment 8 46 Send Box Density 8 42 Silent Mode 8 45 System Initialization 8 44 AppleTalk Appendix 27 Setup 2 14 Applications 8 60 Attention Indicator 1 4 Auto Image Rotation 4 32 C Cassette Loading Paper 2 20 Paper Size and Media Type 8 5 Cassette 1 1 4 Cassette 2 1 4 Caution Labels ix CD ROM 2 2 Centering 5 6 Changing Language 2 10 8 2 Character Entry Method Appendix 10 Cleaning Dual scanning area 9 3 Glass Platen 9 2 Original Cover 9 2 Separator 9 4 Slit Glass 9 3 Transfer Roller 9 6 Clip Holder 1 4 Color Background Density Adjust 5 20 Color Grayscale Black and White Selec tion 5 21 Color Profiles 5 32 Color Type 5 31 8 30 Gray Adjustment 8 46 Auto Paper Selection Appendix 27 Color mode 3 6 Auto Sleep 2 9 Appendix 27 Color Selection Send Store 8 17 B Color type 5 31 Background density adjust Combine Mode Send 5 20 2 in 1 Mode 4 13 Bonjour Appendix 27 4 in 1 Mode 4 13 Booklet from Sheets 4 19 Page Boundary Lines 4 14 Left side 4 19 Connecting Right side 4 19 LAN Cable 2 5 Top binding 4 19 Po
103. 00 100 a Keys Y a 25 400 10 Keys Copies Top Edge Top Cancel a OK 08 08 2009 10 10 Select vertical and horizontal magnifications individually Reduce or enlarge original images in 1 increments between 25 and 400 1 5 6 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Set the original on the platen and press Layout Edit gt Zoom Press Standard Zoom to use Auto Zoom Press or to change the displayed magnification as desired You can also enter the magnification directly using the numeric keys by pressing Keys When using Preset Zoom select the key of desired magnification When using XY Zoom press XY Zoom Press or to change the displayed magnifications of X horizontal and Y vertical You can also enter the magnification directly using the numeric keys by pressing Keys Press Original Orientation to select orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Then press OK Press OK Press the Start key Copying begins OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Duplex Copying Produce two sided copies The following duplex options are available You can also create single sided copies from two sided originals or originals with facing pages such as books The following modes are available One sided to Two sided a F Produces two sided copies from one sided origina
104. 080 01 25 14 14 doc20070225141427 000081 01 25 14 22 doc20070225142253 000082 01 25 14 23 doc20070225142310 000083 01 25 14 24 doc20070225142458 000084 01 25 14 30 doc20070225143034 Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device _ Paper Supplies Communication 08 08 2009 10 10 OPERATION GUIDE 7 9 Status Job Cancel Checking the Detailed Information of Histories Check the detailed information of each history Display of the detailed information of Job Finish history Use the procedure below to check the job finish history 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 Press Printing Jobs Sending Jobs or Storing Jobs and then Log 3 Select the job to check details from the list and press Detail Job Type All lt 7 dob he Ents _ hve a i Detailed information of the selected job is 000080 01 25 14 14 doc20070225141427 Completed di d 000081 01 25 14 22 o doc20070225142253 Completed Isp aye 000082 01 25 14 23 doc20070225142310 Completed tania Gelade Neteller I NOTE To check the information of the next previous 000084 01 25 14 30 doc20070225143034 Completed page press v or A Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device Paper lies 08 08 2009 10 10 4 To exit from the detailed information press Close 7 10 OPERATION GUIDE Status Job Cancel Sending the Job Log History You can send the job log history by e
105. 0x200dpi Fine 200x400dpi Super Fine 300x300dpi 400x400dpi Ultra Fine or 6 00x600dpi The procedure for adjusting the scanning resolution when sending a scanned image is explained below 1 a4 Ready ine send Destination Place original Scan Resolution i Select fineness of scanning resolution The larger the number the better the image resolution al Add Shortcut Cancel lel OK 08 08 2009 10 10 Press the Send key Place the originals on the platen Press Color Image Quality and then Scan Resolution Select the resolution Press OK 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 5 18 OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions Sharpness Select the sharpness of the image outline The table below shows the available settings Item Detail Sharpen Emphasize the image outline Make letters and lines appear sharper Unsharpen Blur the image outline Can weaken a Moire effect grids appearing as wavelike patterns when scanning printed photos Use the procedure below to set the sharpness when sending scanned images 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality and then Sharpness 4 ral Ready O edl haan Press 3 to 3 Unsharpen Sharpen to adjust Place original 1 the sharpness i 5 Press OK Unsharpen Sharpen ian HHE Cancel el OK 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify
106. 1 Sizes 2 Inch models A3 B4 A4 A4 R A5 R B5 B5 R Folio 8K 16K 16K R Metric models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il 8K 16K 16K R Media Type Plain 105 g m or less Rough Vellum 64 g m or less Recycled Preprint Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead High Quality Custom 1 8 To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Paper Weight on page 8 7 When the paper weight settings shown below are selected the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected e Custom 1 to 8 Heavy1 Heavy 2 Heavy3 or Extra Heavy To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 8 10 k k OPERATION GUIDE 8 5 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for each cassette 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings Next of Cassette Setting Next of Cassette 1 to Cassette 4 on which you want to register the size and then Change of Paper Size 3 To detect paper size automatically press Auto and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size To select paper size press Standard Sizes 1 or Standard Sizes 2 for Paper Size 4 Press OK The previous screen reappears 5 Press Change of Media Type to select media type and press OK Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray Select size and media type for mul
107. 16 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use Sending E mail Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images loaded onto this machine as E mail attachments To use this function this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol Before sending images loaded onto this machine as E mail attachments check the following e The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server A full time connection via a LAN is recommended SMTP Settings Use Embedded Web Server to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server If limits have been set on the size of E mail messages it may not be possible to send very large E mails The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below 1 Click Advanced gt SMTP gt General Stat Basic Printer Scanner FAX i FAX Jobs Document Box Advanced i je SMTP Pr E le General E mail Recipient 1 E mail Recipient 2 E mail Recipient 3 TCP IP d SMTP Protocol on off AppleTalk i IP NetBEUI SMTP Port Number 25 E SMTP Server Name mailserver kyocera com POPS gt E mail Recipient 1 SHUE SSP UTES 30 seconds Manag ment E mail Recipient 2 a eee ee on O POP before SM Authenticate as gt RABA aon OPERATION GUIDE 2 17 Preparation before Use 2 Enter the correct settings in each field The settings to be specified in the SMTP settings scree
108. 2009 _ 10 10 6 Ifthe document is protected by a password enter the password using the numeric keys 7 Specify the number of copies to print as desired 8 Press Start Print to start printing Upon completion of printing the Private Print job is automatically deleted 6 12 OPERATION GUIDE Document Box Deleting a Document You can delete documents stored in a Private Print Stored Job box Use the procedure below to delete a document Press the Document Box key Press Job Box Select Private Print Stored Job and press Open Select the creator of the document and press Open To delete the document select the document and press Delete When the delete confirmation screen appears KZ a tHe press Yes lJ 2File 10 10 2008 09 45 J ae 10 10 2008 09 50 If the document is protected by a password enter L ae i the password using the numeric keys and the Lj a srie 10 10 A008 10 0 document is deleted 08 08 2009 10 10 Quick Copy Proof and Hold Print Box Quick Copy Proof and Hold box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Quick Copy or Proof and Hold Print job Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Quick Copy or Proof and Hold Print job using the printer driver Setting the Number of Stored Jobs To maintain free space on the hard disk you can set the maximum number of stored jobs Use the procedure belo
109. 4 R B5 B5 R A5 Folio 8K 16K and 16K R IMPORTANT e You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating Such paper may cause paper jams or other faults e When using media types other than plain paper such as recycled or colored paper always specify the media type setting Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2 26 The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 105 g m Do not load paper that is heavier than 106 g m in the cassettes Use the multi purpose tray for paper that is heavier than 106 g m 1 Pull the cassette out toward you until it stops NOTE Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time 2 Using the paper length guide move the plate to fit the paper When loading A4 or smaller paper into cassette 1 lift up the paper length guide For B4 or larger paper lower the paper length guide NOTE Paper sizes are marked on the cassette 3 Holding the paper width adjusting tab move the paper width guides to fit the paper 2 20 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use NOTE Paper sizes are indicated on the cassettes To change between inch size and metric size A B sizes follow the steps below to adjust the size switch 1 Holding the paper width adjusting tab move the paper width guide to a position other than that of the paper 2 Turn the size switch A 90 gt 3 Mov
110. 4agdana eek an ta taken Geet eo ehe Hota RAE Saale ee eG es 4 34 File NAMG sessast ohh ad emaes eokaee ae PREGA ROE RoR Ed GRR Rs PRM Ra eee ree 4 35 Priority Override 243 c d404ebappedenedbhyeede tbe petted dlp eeden sabia eee ee ed 4 35 Repeat Copy 200 ccc eee ete 4 36 5 Sending Functions Original Size Selection sse es casei egiexvndeareda sh eauleredoeewta betas eed PEE Aas 5 2 Sending Size Selection 0 0 0 eee eee ee 5 3 ZOOM ix 5 ieee rara a had eh me Eee ee ee a a ek et ten RN ey hed koe Be 5 5 CONTCRING cererii GPS ep aed OE Meda ates Phe ae PR Red ERA See Pe Sad Pate eels 5 6 Mixed Sized OriginalS 2 25 04464544 eth eseb4eee eae eidae bebe Pibae ei egaada hte 5 7 1 sided 2 sided Selection 0 0 eee ae 5 10 Original Orientation sete gene aga yb ne Pe ee Ph ee PR Ate Ge a eee ete 5 11 File FORMAL shea eae nad date ke a ocean E E ae eee oA aes Sd Renee aed 2S 5 12 File Separation es 4 44 eig niai gaa AE ala eee Relea i wide Peta ead Algae a 5 13 PDF Encryption Functions 0 0 0 cece ERA tees 5 14 Image Quality e nc4a4 oss Whale een ee weaken ee ee ek baie e ea tides wee dak 5 16 Adjusting Densi ses edctesece beth dvi eye seas at eee Chae eee Chwace E ASAS 5 17 Scan RESON osa e0b09 Adare end dade eae AS Mae dd begs aed hd oe hee 5 18 SMANDNOSS si eeri git ad RE leh a BG ERS ERR ee Ea Hal a ES ae Ew SRS ag ee ees 5 19 Background Density Adjustment 0 0 0 0 0 0 c eee eee eae 5 20 Color Gr
111. 6 R 105 x 148 mm A3 297 x 420 mm B6 R 128 x 182 mm B4 257 x 364 mm Hagaki 100x148mm A4 297 x 210 mm Oufuku Hagaki 148 x 200 mm A4 R 210 x 297 mm Executive 7 1 4 x10 1 2 B5 257 x 182 mm Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm B5 R 182 x 257 mm Envelope C5 162 x 229mm A5 R 148 x 210 mm Envelope C4 229 x 324mm Folio 210 x 330 mm ISO B5 176 x 250 mm Ledger Envelope 10 Commercial 10 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 Legal Envelope 9 Commercial 9 3 7 8 x 8 7 8 Letter Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 3 5 8 x 6 1 2 Letter R Envelope Monarch 3 7 8 x7 1 2 Statement R Youkei 2 114 x 162 mm Oficio II Youkei 4 105 x 235 mm 8 5 x 13 5 Size Entry 98 x 148 to 297 x 432 mm 8K 273 x 394 mm 16K 273 x 197 mm 16K R 197 x 273 mm OPERATION GUIDE Appendix 15 Smoothness The paper surface should be smooth With paper that is too smooth and slippery several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once causing jams Basis Weight In countries that use the metric system basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in area In the United States basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream 500 sheets of paper cut to the standard size or trade size for a specific grade of paper Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams which may cause excessive wear of the machine
112. 9 Precaution 10 16 Paper Length Guide 2 20 Paper Selection 4 4 Cassette 4 4 Multi Purpose Tray 4 5 Paper Width Guides 2 20 Part Names 1 1 Platen 1 4 Placing Originals 2 30 POP3 Appendix 29 POP3 E mail RX Protocol Detail 8 66 PostScript Appendix 29 Power Cable Connecting 2 6 Power Off 2 8 Power On 2 7 Power Supply xi PPM Appendix 29 Precautions for Use xii Preparation 2 1 Preparing Cables 2 4 Print Job Reordering 3 43 Printed Document Guard Kit Appendix 9 OPERATION GUIDE Index 5 Index Printer Setup 8 34 Printer Driver Appendix 29 Printer Settings 8 34 Copies 8 36 CR Action 8 38 Duplex 8 36 EcoPrint 8 35 Emulation 8 34 Form Feed Timeout 8 37 LF Action 8 37 Orientation 8 37 Override A4 Letter 8 35 Paper Feed Mode 8 38 Printing 3 21 Printing from Applications 3 21 Printing Reports Sending Notice 8 39 Font List 8 39 Network Status Page 8 40 Service Status Page 8 40 Status Page 8 39 Transmission Result Reports 8 40 Priority Override 4 35 7 14 Product Library 2 2 Programmed Copying 3 46 Editing and Deleting 3 47 Recalling 3 46 Registering 3 46 Punch 3 19 Q Quick No Search key 1 3 3 3 Quick Setup Screen 3 43 Reserve Next 3 15 Reserve Next Priority 8 27 Resolution Appendix 22 Appendix 23 Restarting the System 8 63 S Safety Conventions Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnec tion of Power xvi Scan Resolution 5 18 Default settings 8 16 Scanner Cleaning 8 47 Secure P
113. 9a0 cd05 b1d2 28a 1fc0 a1 10ae 140 NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 lt blue gt for details on entering characters Press Connection Test to check the connection to the computer you chose If the connection fails check the entries you made 9 Check if the destination entry is correct and press Register The destination is added to the Address Book Adding a Group Compile two or more contacts into a group Designations in the group can be added at the same time When adding a group a maximum of 500 groups can be added in the Address Book NOTE Before adding a group in the Address Book the contacts to be included in the group must be added first Up to 100 destinations for the e mail 500 destinations for the FAX and the total of 10 destinations for the FTP and SMB can be registered per a group Use the procedure below to register a group 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Edit Destination Register Edit of Address Book Add Group and then Next 3 To specify the address number press Change in Address Number OPERATION GUIDE 8 53 Default Setting System Menu 4 Use or the numeric keys to enter an address number 1 to 2500 To have the number assigned automatically set 0000 NOTE Address Number is an ID for a group You can select any available number out of 2 000 numbers for contacts and 500 numbers for groups If you specify an address number that i
114. ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence OPERATION GUIDE xxiii Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1 2 11 12 Software shall mean the digitally encoded machine readable scalable outline data as encoded ina special format as well as the UFST Software You agree to accept a non exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights styles and versions of letters numerals characters and symbols Typefaces solely for your own customary business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging Under the terms of this License Agreement you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers you need to acquire a multi user license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging Monotype Imaging retains all rights title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary informatio
115. ATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys Save frequently used destinations to Address Book or One Touch Keys The saved destinations can be changed The destinations are available for Send as E mail Send to Folder and Fax Transmission optional Adding a Destination Add a new destination to the Address Book There are two registering methods contacts and groups When adding a group enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges Adding a contact A maximum of 1 000 contact addresses can be registered Each address can include the information such as destination name E mail address FTP server folder path computer folder path and FAX No optional Use the procedure below to register a new individual contact 1 Press the System Menu key Press Edit Destination Register Edit of Address Book Add Contact and then Next 2 3 To specify the address number press Change in Address Number 4 Press or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number 1 2500 To have the number assigned automatically enter 0000 NOTE Address Number is an ID for a destination You can select any available number out of 2 500 numbers for contacts and 500 numbers for groups If you spe
116. Copy Box 6 15 Job Finish Notice 5 29 Copy 4 34 Send 5 29 K Key Counter Appendix 8 KPDL Appendix 29 L Label Appendix 19 LAN Cable Connecting 2 5 LAN Interface Setup 8 71 LDAP Protocol Detail 8 66 Left Cover 1 1 4 Left Cover 1 Lever 1 4 Left Cover 2 1 4 Legal Information xx Login 3 2 11 3 Logout 3 2 11 3 LPD Protocol Detail 8 66 M Main Power Switch 1 6 Management 11 1 N Negative Image 4 32 NetBEUI Appendix 29 Job Accounting 11 14 User Login Administration 11 2 Margin Centering Mode 4 15 Memo Mode 4 25 Mirror Image 4 33 Mixed Sized Originals 4 7 Combinations 4 7 Copy Size 4 9 Send 5 7 Monotype Imaging License Agreement xxiv MP Tray Cleaning 8 47 Multi Purpose MP Tray Appendix 29 Paper Size and Media 2 28 8 6 Multi Purpose Tray 1 6 Multi Sending Sending to Different Types of Destinations 3 32 Protocol Detail 8 66 NetWare Appendix 29 Setup 8 67 Network Preparation 2 12 Setup 8 64 Network Cable 2 4 Connecting 2 5 Network Interface 2 4 O One Touch Key Changing the Registered Information 8 56 Deleting the Registered Information 8 56 Editing 8 55 Open SSL xxii Operation Panel 1 2 1 4 Option 3 000 sheet document finisher Appendix 4 3 000 sheet paper feeder Appendix 4 Data Security Kit Appendix 9 Document Finisher Appendix 4 Document Processor Appendix 4 Document Table Appendix 9 Expansion Memory Appendix 9 FAX Kit Appendix 9 Index 4 OPERATION GUIDE Index Job Separa
117. D Scan 4 Press From Computer and press Execute Use the software installed on the computer to send the images 5 28 OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions Job Finish Notice Sends a notice by e mail when a job is completed Use the procedure below to specify the Job Finish Notice settings Ready to send Place original E Job Finish Notice a a Address Book Address Entry Destination Detail Address Book Add Shortcut Ready to send Place original Job Finish Notice GB Address Book E mail Address m Address Entry Cancel 4 OK 08 08 2009 10 10 Destination Add Shortcut Cancel 4l OK 08 08 2009 10 10 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Advanced Setup and then Job Finish Notice 4 To select the destination from the address book press Address Book on the left of the screen and then press Address Book in the next screen Select the destination to be notified then press OK You can view information on the notification destination by pressing Detail 5 Specify the destination to send the finish notice and press OK NOTE For the procedure to select the destination from the Address Book refer Specifying Destination on page 3 30 6 Todirectly enter the address press Address Entry and then E mail Address 7 Enter the E mail ad
118. K OPERATION GUIDE 4 37 Copying Functions 4 38 OPERATION GUIDE 5 Sending Functions This chapter explains the functions available for sending originals Ongmal Size SelechON ks techs iin dinitrate 0 2 Sending Size SELCCHION ssnin innn SS PAD PAT TAEA E ENNE E A tries 5 5 CEMENG niriana kiiin O Mixed Sized Onna PE A A E E EE EE ET EE o 1 sided 2 sided E a 10 Ona COO sssercstr ences semernseeonieemienuaesenacins 5 11 File REE A 12 File Separ iais e 5 13 PDF Encryption Vr PON ica cratarcaisrareiiarsiriantiecantanieetinenintantesiiabintdecinnna A Ae CN AAA A AEE A T 5 16 Adjusting P E Ve CAN ls SOMO disease E E E E E A A E E TEN 5 18 SHa S Sirgnunkeni a ee Background Density AdUSHNENG assesses onesies 5 20 Color Grayscale Black and White Selection E A Sie ie S Seaga OE 5 22 Bordar Erase sanaaa E Enter Document Name File Name sscssasscsicccsciesssescsnscasasasasasonnorpeeeaaee 5 25 Enter E mail Subject and BOY ivic iiisiiiniscinscinoiicorsmiscarsenesrennenitenenee WoD SCAN aaee 5 27 Jou Finem NOICE arasen ee SEE e a A A S T E TAE OA ETE 5 30 Send and 30 FTE Stier Se TX spine aee CODI YP Eaei e About Color Profile Seriens Ee 5 32 OPERATION GUIDE 5 1 Sending Functions Original Size Selection Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning Be sure to select the original size when using originals of nonstandard sizes Choose the original size from the following groups
119. K Move to the copy screen and press the Reset key Auto Paper Selection If Auto is selected for Paper Selection set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes The table below shows the available settings a a a ae Most Suitable Size Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original Same as Original Size Select paper that matches the size of the original regardless the zoom 8 26 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to specify the action performed for Auto Paper Selection 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Copy and Change of Auto Paper Selection 3 Press Most Suitable Size or Same as Original Size 4 Press OK 5 Move to the copy screen and press the Reset key Auto Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected select whether automatic zoom reduce zoom is performed The table below shows the available settings a a ee No zoom performed copied in original size Automatic zoom performed as appropriate Use the procedure below to specify the automatic zoom priority 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Copy and Change of Auto Priority 3 Select the default for Off or On 4 Press OK 5 Move to the copy screen and press the Reset key Reserve Next Priority Select the operation of the reserve copy and interrupt copy functions and for canceling jobs Use the
120. Letter Letter R Executive R Statement R A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R Folio Paper Type Paper weight 45 160 g m Paper type plain recycled color thin Dimensions 20 13 16 18 11 16 3 3 16 W x D x H 530 x 475 x 82 mm Weight 3 3 Ibs or less 1 5 kg or less Built in Finisher Item Description Number of Trays 1 tray Paper Size Ledger Legal A3 B4 Folio 250 sheets Non stapling Letter Letter R A4 A4 R B5 500 sheets 60 to 80 g m Maximum Sheets Ledger Legal A3 B4 Folio 20 sheets for Stapling Letter Letter R A4 A4 R B5 30 sheets Paper weight 80 g m or less Dimensions 12 3 16 16 1 8 6 5 16 W x D x H 310 x 410 x160 mm Weight 20 Ibs or less 9 kg or less NOTE Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types Appendix 26 OPERATION GUIDE Glossary Accessibility The machine is designed featuring good accessibility even for the elderly and those who are physically challenged or visually impaired Touch panel characters can be enlarged while the touch panel is adjustable in two angles AppleTalk AppleTalk which comes with Apple Computer s Mac OS is a network protocol AppleTalk enables file printer sharing and also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk network Auto Form Feed Timeout During data transmission the machine may sometimes have to wait unti
121. Managing the Copier Printer Counts on page 11 18 Restriction Items Split selected for Copier Printer Count Item Detail Copy Restriction Total Print Restriction Total Limits the total number of sheets used for copying Limits the total number of sheets used for printing Scan Restriction Others Limits the number of sheets scanned excludes copying FAX TX Restriction FAX Port Restriction Limits the number of sheets sent by fax This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed Restricts the ports used for faxing This is displayed when two optional FAX kits are installed 11 18 OPERATION GUIDE Management Total selected for Copier Printer Count Item Detail Print Restriction Total Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing Scan Restriction Others Limits the number of sheets scanned excludes copying FAX TX Restriction Limits the number of sheets sent by fax This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed FAX Port Restriction Restricts the ports used for faxing This is displayed when two optional FAX kits are installed Applying Restriction Restriction can be applied in two modes as follows Item Description Off No restriction given Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one page increments up to 9 999 999 copies Reject Usage Restriction is applied Select Off Use Po
122. Menu Zoom Select the enlarged reduced default when paper size sending size changed after the originals set The available default settings are shown below Item Description Copy send save at actual size 100 Automatically reduce or enlarge the originals to match paper size sending size Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults v and then Change of Zoom 3 Select the default zoom setting 4 Press OK File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name default for jobs Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No GH can also be set NOTE Refer to page 4 35 and page 5 25 for name entry Use the procedure below to set the default file name 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults v and then Change of File Name Entry 3 Press File Name to enter the file name in not more than 32 characters NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 lt blue gt for details on entering characters 4 Press OK 5 Press Date and Time to add the date time to the job or press Job No to add the job number to the job The added information will be displayed in Additional Info 6 Press OK E mail Subject Body Set the subject and body automatically entered default subject and body when sending the scanned origi
123. Mixed paper weight i e thickness may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly The recommended basis weight is between 60 and 163 g m for the cassettes and between 60 to 220 g m for the multi purpose tray Thickness Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin Signs that paper may be thin include frequent problems with paper jams or with several sheets being supplied at once Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick The proper thickness is between 0 086 and 0 110 mm Moisture Content Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage Moisture affects how the paper is supplied the electrostatic changeability of the paper and how the toner adheres Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room High relative humidity causes paper to become damp making the edges expand so it appears wavy Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6 To maintain the right level of moisture content bear in mind the following considerations Store paper in a cool well ventilated place e Store paper flat and unopened in the package Once the package is opened reseal it if the p
124. N GUIDE Sending Functions Al Ready to send i 4 Press Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Place original 1 Others or Size Entry to select original size Standard Ledger Letter Sizes 1 t aren Letter Legal Statement Sizes 2 Statement 0 11x15 8 5x13 5 Original Size Original Zoom Paper _ a Ready to send Destination When you have selected Size Entry press or Place original il to set the sizes of X horizontal and Y vertical 5 sages By pressing Keys you can use the numeric keys 5 Press OK Original os Zoom Paper sae Add Shortcut 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending Sending Size Selection Select the sending size the size of image to be sent The table below lists the sizes Standard Select from Same Inch models Same as Original Size Ledger Sizes 1 as Original Size or Legal Letter Statement 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il Standard Size 11x15 Metric models Same as Original Size A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 B6 A6 Folio Standard Select from Inch models A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 B6 A6 Folio Sizes 2 standard size 8K 16K t St ee ei Metric models Ledger Legal Letter Statement es 1 8 5 13 5 Oficio Il 11x15 8K 16K Others Select from Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Hagaki OPERATION GUIDE 5 3 Sending Functions Relationship between
125. P settings Login user name and login password If the sender is a domain user specify the domain name Path Folder share permissions of the recipient Failed to send via SMB Check the SMB settings Login user name and login password If the sender is a domain user specify the domain name Path Folder share permissions of the recipient Failed to send via FTP Check the FTP settings Path Folder share permissions of the recipient OPERATION GUIDE 10 11 Troubleshooting Error Message Failed to send the e mail Failed to send i FAX Corrective Actions Check the e mail address If the address is rejected by the domain you cannot send the e mail Check the i FAX address If the address is rejected by the domain you cannot send i FAX Reference Page FAX System S Operation Guide Chapter 8 Internet Faxing i FAX Option Failed to send via SMB Select On of the SMB settings on the Embedded Web Server Failed to send the e mail Select On of the SMTP settings on the Embedded Web Server Failed to send via FTP Select On of the FTP settings on the Embedded Web Server 2 17 Failed to send i FAX Select On of the i FAX settings on the Embedded Web Server FAX System S Operation Guide Chapter 8 Internet Faxing i FAX Option Failed to send the e mail Failed to send i FAX Check the sender add
126. Priority To make double copies press Double Copy and proceed to step 8 5 Press or to set the zoom size Press Keys to enter with numeric keys Off S Speaty 6 Toset the area of the original to be repeated press Repeat Area On for Specify Repeat Area 08 08 2009 10 10 OPERATION GUIDE 4 27 Copying Functions 7 Press or to input the area of the original to be repeated With metric models you can enter the border width directly using the numeric keys after pressing Keys Y1 Length from top left of platen to top edge of repeat area X1 Length from Height from top left of platen to left edge of repeat area Y2 Height of repeat area X2 Width of repeat area 8 Press OK 9 Press the Start key Copying begins 4 28 OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions EcoPrint Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing Use this function for test copies or any other occasion where high quality print is unnecessary The procedure for making copies using EcoPrint is explained below 1 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Image Quality and then EcoPrint 2 3 4 Press On 5 Ready to copy EcoPrint Press OK Conserve toner when printing Use EcoPrint for test copies and other situations where high quality copies are not necessary a Cancel d OK 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Press the Start k
127. Punch optional feature Orientation Confirmation Setting Use the procedure below to select the default Orientation Confirmation setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings and Change of Orientation Confirmation 3 Select the default for Off or On 4 Press OK Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm up is completed or the Reset key is pressed GE Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending Setting the frequently used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier IMPORTANT When you have changed the defaults to enable the change immediately move to the copy send or document box screen and press the Reset key Original Orientation Set the original orientation defaults The available default settings are shown below Le D Top Edge Top Select the original s top edge at the top Top Edge Left Select the original s top edge at the left Refer to page 4 10 for Original Orientation Use the procedure below to select the default orientation when originals are placed on the platen 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of Original Orientation 3 Select Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left for the default 4 Press OK OPERATION GUIDE 8 15 Default Setting System Menu Continuous Scan Set the continuous scan defaults The available default sett
128. RUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE xxii OPERATION GUIDE Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must re
129. TE For loading instructions refer to Loading Originals on page 2 30 3 Check that Auto is selected of Paper Selection on the touch panel Paper that matches the size of the original will be selected automatically To change the paper size press Org Paper Finishing Paper Selection and select the desired paper source NOTE Select paper size manually if necessary instead of using automatic paper selection 4 Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity Specify the desired number up to 999 5 Press the Start key to start copying 6 Remove the finished copies from the top tray OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Adjusting Density Use this procedure to adjust the density when copying Density Adjustment Option Description Manual Adjust density using 7 or 13 levels Auto Optimum density is selected according to the density of the original NOTE You may choose Auto mode as the default setting refer to Density on page 8 18 The procedure for adjusting the density of copies is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Set the original on the platen and press Image Quality gt Density Ready to copy Copies 4 Adjust density manually pressing 3 Lighter to B 3 Darker You can change the density level 3 Derai Lighter to 3 Darker in half steps To change density adjustment from Manual to Auto press Auto 5 P
130. TION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Editing a Contact 1 Change Address Number Name and destination type and address Refer to Adding a contact on page 8 57 for the details After you have completed the changes press Register Press Yes in the change confirmation screen to register the changed destination Editing a Group 1 Change Address Number and Name Refer to Adding a Group on page 8 53 for the details 2 Press Member 3 To delete any destination from the group select the destination and press Delete Press Yes on the screen to confirm the deletion After you have completed the changes press Register Press Yes in the change confirmation screen to register the changed group Deleting a Contact or Group Repeat Steps 1 to 3 press Delete Press Yes on the screen to confirm the deletion Deletion is performed Adding a Destination on One Touch Key GE Add a new destination contact or group A maximum of 1000 destinations can be registered NOTE Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 30 for use of One Touch Key Use the procedure below to register a new destination under a One Touch key 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Edit Destination and Register Edit of One Touch Key 3 Selecta One Touch Key number 0001 to 1000 for the destination Pressing Quick No Search key or No enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number Select a One Touch Key with no registered destinati
131. The phone receiver is off the hook Put down the receiver The removable memory is not formatted Is the removable memory formatted by this machine Use the removable memory formatted by this machine Top tray of the machine is full of paper Remove paper from the top tray and press Continue Unknown Toner Installed PC Is the unauthorized product installed Install our genuine product that is specified for this machine Warning low memory Job cannot be started Try again later 10 10 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting Responding to Send Error When an error occurs during transmission Send Error appears Check the error code and error message below and follow the corresponding corrective actions Error Message Corrective Actions Reference Page Failed to send the e mail Check the host name of the SMTP Failed to send i FAX server on the Embedded Web Server Failed to send via FTP Check the host name of FTP Failed to send via SMB Check the host name of SMB Failed to send via SMB Check the SMB settings Login user name and login password If the sender is a domain user specify the domain name Host name Path Failed to send the e mail Check the followings on the Failed to send i FAX Embedded Web Server SMTP login user name and login password POP3 login user name and login password Failed to send via FTP Check the FT
132. Top Open Book Original such Book Binding Left as magazine and book Binding Right i Only when the optional document processor is used Use the procedure below to select the original type and binding direction when sending scanned originals 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Original Sending Data Format and then 2 sided Book Original El Ready to send Destination 4 Press 1 sided 2 sided or Book Place original 1 _2 sidet Book Original 5 When selecting 2 sided select the binding direction and press Original Orientation to select the direction in which the original is set on the platen When selecting Book select the binding direction Top Edge Top 6 Press O K Original Orientation 08 08 2009 10 10 7 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 5 10 OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions Original Orientation To send the document in the orientation that can be read properly specify the upper orientation of original To use the functions below select the orientation in which the original is set on the platen e 2 sided Book Original Border Erase If On is selected as the Orientation Confirmation page 8 15 setting in the System Menu the selection screen for original orientation appears when you select any of the above functions When placing the original on the platen
133. Waiting Canceling Canceling the job Pause Pausing the job yw of Job Type Only selected type of jobs is displayed Cancel Select the job you want to cancel from the list and press this key Detail Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from the list and press this key Refer to Checking the Detailed Information of Histories on page 7 10 OPERATION GUIDE 7 5 Status Job Cancel Storing Jobs Status screen Status Status Log 4 Job Type All y 7 ob No Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device Li o Status 08 08 2009 10 10 Display Key Details Job No Acceptance No of job Accepted Time Accepted Time of job Type Icons that indicate the job type EStoring Job Scan S Storing Job Printer eS Storing Job FAX T mStoring Job i FAX Join Box Document get ECopy Box Document Sige Job Name Job name or file name is displayed User Name User Name for the executed job Status Status of job InProcess The status before starting to save such as during scanning originals Storing Storing Data Canceling Canceling the job Pause Pausing the job yw of Job Type Only selected type of jobs is displayed Cancel Select the job you want to cancel from the list and press this key Detail Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from the list and press this key Refer to Checking the Detailed Informat
134. a sample to ensure the print quality is satisfactory General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper Transparencies Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing Transparencies must meet the following conditions Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190 C Thickness 0 100 to 0 110 mm Material Polyester Dimensional accuracy 0 7 mm Squareness of corners 90 0 2 To avoid problems use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the machine If transparencies jam frequently at output try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected Hagaki Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray fan them and align the edges If the Hagaki paper is curled straighten it before loading Printing onto curled Hagaki may cause jams Use unfolded Oufuku Hagaki available at post offices Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler Envelopes Use the multi purpose tray for envelopes Due to the structure of envelopes printing evenly over the entire surface m
135. aced on the platen replace the original and press the Start key After scanning all originals press Finish Scan to start copying 4 14 OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Margin Centering Mode Shift the original image to make space on the copy for binding on the left right or top bottom side When you copy onto paper different from the original size you can center the original image on the paper The following margin widths are available Inch Models 0 75 to 0 75 in 0 01 increments Metric Models 18 mm to 18 mm in 1 mm increments Margin on the Back Side When duplex copying you can also specify the margin on the back side Auto When Auto is selected an appropriate margin is applied automatically on the rear page depending on a margin specified for the front page and a binding orientation Separate Front Back Margins Enables you to specify the front and back settings separately NOTE You can set the default margin width Refer to Margin Default on page 8 21 for details Use the procedure below to make copies with margins Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Layout Edit and then Margin Centering Press Margin to select the copy with margin Ready to copy Copies Margin Centering Use or to enter the margins for Left Right and r f eee 18 18 o Top Bottom Press Keys to use the numeric E keys for entry Aut
136. achine Moving a Document Copying a Document The procedure for moving or copying documents is explained below Rall A File Name A Date and Time 7 E 0404200710574501 10 10 2008 09 40 21 MB Search Name E 0404200710574511 10 10 2008 09 50 21 MB El 0404200710574521 10 10 2008 10 00 21 MB 1 1 Detail V Preview Join i Move Copy Delete E File Custom Box Move Copy i Select the required operation and press Next Copy to Move to Custom Box Custom Box Copy to Removable Mem d Close 08 08 2009 10 10 08 08 2009 _ 10 10 1 2 Press the Document Box key Press Custom Box select the box containing the document you want to move or copy and press Open NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password 3 Select the document in the list that you want to move or copy by pressing the checkbox The document is marked with a checkmark NOTE To deselect press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark 4 Press Move Copy To move the document press Move to Custom Box To copy the document press Copy to Custom Box or Copy to Removable Mem Press Next OPERATION GUIDE Document Box Job Box Move to Custom Box i Select the destination box and press Move No Name 0001 Documenti Administrator 0002 Document2 Administrator 0003 Document3 Admi
137. acked in boxes Ideally the packaging itself should have been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture Specially treated paper We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper even if it conforms to the basic specifications When you use these kinds of paper purchase a small amount first as a sample to test e Glossy paper e Watermarked paper e Paper with an uneven surface e Perforated paper Special Paper This section describes printing onto special paper and print media The following paper and media can be used e Transparencies e Preprinted paper Bond paper e Recycled paper e Thin paper from 60 g m to 64 g m or less e Letterhead e Colored paper e Prepunched paper Envelopes e Cardstocks Hagaki e Thick paper from 106 g m to 200 g m or less e Labels e High quality paper When using these paper and media choose that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers such as laser printers Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies thick paper envelopes cardstocks and label paper OPERATION GUIDE Appendix 17 Choosing Special Paper Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine print quality will vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper Thus special paper is more likely than regular paper to cause printing problems Before purchasing special paper in volume try testing
138. age Border Erase performed in the same setting as the front page Do Not Erase No Border Erase performed on the back page 8 20 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu NOTE Refer to page 4 17 and page 5 23 for Border Erase Use the procedure below to specify the border erase setting for the back of the page 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults v and then Change of Border Erase to Back Page 3 Press Same as Front Page or Do Not Erase 4 Press OK Margin Default Set the default margin The table below shows the measurement ranges that can be set Inch 0 75 to 0 75 in 0 01 increments Metric 18 mm to 18 mm in 1 mm increments Use the procedure below to set the default margin width Gi 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults v and then Change of Margin Default 3 Use the or to enter the margin widths for Left Right and Top Bottom You can use the numeric keys to enter the number directly 4 Press OK Auto Image Rotation Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting The table below shows the available settings OO e OOO OOOO O ee No Auto Image Rotation performed Auto Image Rotation performed NOTE Refer to page 4 32 for Auto Image Rotation Use the procedure below to set the default Auto Image Rotation settings 1 Press the System Menu
139. al 50 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments i For instructions on how to specify the custom original sizes Custom 1 to 4 refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8 4 The input units can be changed in the System menu Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8 11 Use the procedure below to select the original size 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Org Paper Finishing and then Original Size 4 2 OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions 4 Press Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others or Size Entry to select the original size Ready to copy Original Size Standard N t ba Sizes 1 a Sadan 1 Af Statement A idj ndare Place original Sizes 2 q Statement 11x15 af 8 5x13 5 a eat Lea Original Zoom 100 Paper ea Add Shortcut 08 08 2009 10 10 If Size Entry is selected press or to specify the horizontal size X and the vertical size Y ie Press Keys to enter the size directly using the Standard 2 00 ED L numeric keys Place original gorg i tke 5 Press OK 2 00 11 69 Original i Y l 11 Zoom 100 f Paper aS 2 kes Ready to copy 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Press the Start key to start copying OPERATION GUIDE 4 3 Copying Functions Paper Selection Select the paper source that contains the required paper size NOTE Specify in advance the size and
140. al 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 Weight g m 64g m 60g m 76g m 91g m 106g m 136g m 164g m Transpar Media type or less to to to to to and more encies 75g m 90g m 105g m2 135g m 163g m Plain Y Y Y default Y N N N N Transparency N N N N N N N Y default Rough Y Y Y Y default Y N N N Vellum Y default Y Y Y N N N Labels N N N N Y default Y N Recycled Y Y Y default Y N N Preprinted Y Y Y default Y N N N N Bond Y Y Y Y default Y N N N Cardstock N N N Y Y default N Color Y Y Y default Y N N N Prepunched Y Y Y default Y N N N Letterhead Y Y Y default Y Y N N Thick N N N Y Y Y default y N OPERATION GUIDE 8 7 Default Setting System Menu Paper Weight Normal 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 Envelope N N Y Y default High Quality Y Y default N Custom 1 8 Y Y default Y i When Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Heavy 3 or Extra Heavy is selected the media type cannot be selected for the cassettes For Custom 1 8 settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed Item Description Prohibit Duplex printing not allowed Permit Duplex printing allowed Change names for Custom 1 8 Names should be not more than 15 characters Selecting media type at multi purpose tray the name after change will be displayed Use the procedure below to set the paper weight 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings Next of Original Pa
141. al Orientation to select the original orientation from either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left and press OK For 2 sided originals press Back Page and then press Same as Front Page or Do Not Erase Press OK Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 5 24 OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions Enter Document Name File Name This setting allows you to assign a document name to scanned images You can specify a default for the document name Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned documents that you are sending 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Advanced Setup and then File Name Entry g Ready to send Destination 4 Press File Name Place original 1 File Name Entry Add a file name 1 Additional information such as Job No and Date and Time can also be set Additional Info amp DateandTime J Job No Date and Time Add Shortcut Cancel lel OK 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Enter the document name and press OK NOTE Up to 32 characters can be entered for the document name 6 Press Job No to enter the job No and Date and Time to enter the date and time 7 Press OK 8 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending OPERATION GUIDE 5 25 Sending Functions Enter E mail Subject and Body a Ready ine send Destination Place original
142. al shock from high voltage parts inside the machine Do not damage break or attempt to repair the power cord Do not place heavy objects on the cord pull it unnecessarily or cause any other type of damage These types of situations present a danger of fire or electrical shock Never attempt to repair or disassemble the machine or its parts as there is a danger of personal injury fire electrical shock or exposure to the laser If the laser beam escapes there is a danger of it causing blindness If the machine becomes excessively hot smoke appears from the machine there is an odd smell or any other abnormal situation occurs there is a danger of fire or electrical shock Turn the main power switch off immediately be absolutely certain to remove the power plug from the outlet and then contact your service representative If anything harmful paper clips water other fluids etc falls into the machine turn the main power switch off immediately Next remove the power plug from the outlet to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock Then contact your service representative Do not remove or connect the power plug with wet hands as there is a danger of electrical shock Always contact your service representative for maintenance or repair of internal parts eon A EBO xij OPERATION GUIDE A CAUTION Do not pull the power cord when removing it from the outlet If the power cord is pulled the wires may become broken and th
143. als 2 33 Grayscale 5 21 Appendix 28 Loading Originals 2 32 Green Knob 1 5 Not Supported Originals 2 32 Grounding the Machine xi Part Names 2 32 H Supported Originals 2 32 Help Appendix 28 Document Table Appendix 9 Host Name 8 64 Double Copy 4 27 HTTP dpi Appendix 28 Protocol Detail 8 66 Duplex 3 11 8 36 HTTPS E Protocol Detail 8 67 EcoPrint Mode Appendix 28 I Copy 4 13 Image Quality Print 8 35 Send 5 16 E mail Image repeat copy 4 27 Send as E mail 3 24 Included Guides 2 Emulation Appendix 28 Installation Precautions x Selection 8 34 Interface Block 8 72 Energy Star Program xxv Internet Browser 8 58 Enlarged Display 8 77 Interrupt Clear Timer 8 50 Enter E mail Subject and Body 5 26 Interrupt Copy 3 16 Enter key 1 3 3 3 IP Address Appendix 28 Entry IPP Appendix 29 Body 5 26 IPP over SSL Document Name 5 25 Protocol Detail 8 67 File Name 4 35 5 25 J Subject 5 26 Job OPERATION GUIDE Index 3 Index Available Status 7 2 Canceling 3 42 7 13 Checking History 7 9 Checking Status 7 2 Detailed Information 7 7 Detailed Information of Histories 7 10 Details of the Status Screens 7 3 Displaying History Screen 7 9 Displaying Status Screens 7 2 Pause and Resumption 7 13 Reordering 7 14 Sending the Job Log History 7 11 Job Accounting 11 14 Managing the Copier Printer Counts 11 18 Restricting the Use of the Machine 11 18 Job Box Form Overlay Box 6 17 Private Print Stored Job Box 6 12 Quick Copy Proof and Hold Print Box 6 13 Repeat
144. aper as a sample for testing prior to use Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and contains low levels of paper dust We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications Choosing the Appropriate Paper This section describes guidelines for choosing paper Condition Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled dirty or torn Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper fiber lint or that is especially delicate Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor Appendix 14 OPERATION GUIDE copies but may also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine Choose paper with a smooth and even surface however avoid paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit Ingredient Do not use paper such as paper that has been surface treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon These paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80 pulp i e not more than 20 of the total paper content consists of cotton or other fibers Supported Paper Sizes Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine Measurements in the table take into account a 0 7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width Corner angles must be 90 0 2 Cassette or Multi Multi Purpose Tray Purpose Tray A
145. aper is not to be used for a while Store paper sealed in the original package and box Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors Before using paper that has been stored keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours e Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat sunlight or dampness Other Paper Specifications Porosity The density of the paper fibers Stiffness Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine causing jams Appendix 16 OPERATION GUIDE Curl Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened When paper passes through the fixing unit it curls upward slightly To deliver flat printouts load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray Static electricity During printing paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres Choose paper that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together Whiteness Paper whiteness affects print contrast Use whiter paper for sharper brighter copies Quality Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square edges are rough sheets are uncut or edges or corners are crushed In order to prevent these problems be especially careful when you cut the paper yourself Packaging Choose paper that is properly packaged and st
146. ara 100 Shortcut 5 e Lette 2 sided 2in1 off g gt gt 2 sided Duplex Combine Staple Punch age Qualit Shortcut 6 2 08 08 2009 10 10 1 2 Press the Copy key and place the original on the platen Press Preview The machine starts scanning the original When scanning is completed the preview image appears on the panel To change the quality or the layout press Cancel or the Stop key Change the settings and press Preview again to see a preview image with the new settings NOTE If you scan a multi page original only the first page is previewed 5 If there is no problem with the preview image press the Start key Copying begins OPERATION GUIDE 3 5 Basic Operation Copying Follow the steps as below for basic copying a Shortcut 1 a Sinal Shortcut 2 Shortcut 3 Lz Auto 00 Normal 0 r 9 Shortcut 4 i T a er Zoom Density 2 Original iene Selection 100 Zoom Shortcut 5 Paper gt 2 sided Zini Off gt gt 2 sided Quick Setup Org Paper Image Quality Layout Edit Advanced Finishing Setup 08 08 2009 10 10 1 Press the Copy key when the Copy key indicator is off NOTE If the touch panel is turned off press the Energy Saver key or the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the optional document processor NO
147. are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine e Emulation 8 34 e EcoPrint 8 35 e Override A4 Letter 8 35 Duplex 8 36 e Copies 8 36 e Orientation 8 37 e Form Feed Timeout 8 37 e LF Action 8 37 e CR Action 8 38 e Paper Feed Mode 8 38 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Emulation Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers Selection of emulation The printer can emulate PCL 6 KPDL and KPDL Auto Use the procedure below to select the emulation 1 Press the System Menu Key 2 Press Printer gt Change of Emulation 3 Select the desired emulation NOTE If you selected KPDL Auto set Alternative Emulation too Refer to page 8 34 When you have selected KPDL or KPDL Auto set KPDL Error Report too Refer to page 8 35 4 Press OK Setting of Alternative Emulation When you have selected KPDL Auto as emulation mode you can switch between KPDL and another emulation mode alternative emulation automatically according to the data to print The alternative emulation you can set is PCL6 Use the procedure below to select the alternative emulation 1 Press the System Menu Key 8 34 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu 2 Press Printer gt Change of Emulation gt KPDL Aut
148. ars Maximum 6 applications For example nternet Browser Use the procedure below to select the default startup screen 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings and then Change of Default Screen 3 Select the screen to be displayed as the default screen NOTE The application names appear if the applications are installed and officially licensed on 4 Press OK Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations The table below lists the buzzer types and their settings and details Description Volume 0 Mute 1 Minimum to Set the buzzer volume level 5 Maximum Key Confirmation Off On Emit a sound when the control panel and touch panel keys are pressed Job Finish Off On Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed Ready Off On Emit a sound when the warm up is completed Warning Off On Emit a sound when errors occur OPERATION GUIDE 8 3 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to set the sound options 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings Next of Sound and then Next of Buzzer 3 Press Change of Volume Key Confirmation Job Finish Ready or Warning 4 Select the buzzer volume level or other sound options Original Paper Settings Register additional types and sizes of originals and paper Custom Original Size Setup Set up frequently used custom original sizes The custom size opt
149. assword to edit the PDF file select On of Password to Edit Print Document 9 In the same way as the entry of Password to Open Document enter the password to change the PDF file 10 Press Detail 5 14 OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions 11 Restrict the access level of the PDF file Press y of Printing Allowed to select the item the scope of limit The item to be displayed differs according to the version of Acrobat selected in Compatibility in step 4 File Format Detail Printing Allowed Not Allowed Not Allowed Changes Allowed Copying of Text Images Others Disable Enable OK Cancel ed 08 08 2009 10 10 The table below shows the available settings Item Detail Not Allowed Make the printing of PDF file impossible Allowed Low Resolution only Can print the PDF file only in low resolution Allowed Can print the PDF file in original resolution Only displayed when Acrobat 5 0 and later is selected in Compatibility 12 Press y of Changes Allowed and select the item the scope of limit The item to be displayed differs according to the version of Acrobat selected in Compatibility in step 4 The table below shows the available settings Not Allowed Cannot change the PDF file Commenting Can only add commenting Inserting Deleting Rotating Pages Can only insert delete and rotate the pages of the PDF file Page Layout except
150. aste Toner Box Replacement 00 06 OPERATION GUIDE 9 1 Maintenance Cleaning Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality CAUTION For safety always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine Original Cover Glass Platen Wipe the backside of the original cover the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent IMPORTANT Do not use thinner or other organic solvents Original Cover SWW F F TE i i 9 2 OPERATION GUIDE Maintenance Slit Glass Dual scanning area 1 Open the document processor 2 Clean the surface of the slit glass located on the left side with the supplied dry cloth 3 Close the document processor and press End Note that dirty glass and sheet may cause black streaks to appear in the output If black streaks or dirt appears in copies when using the optional document processor clean the slit glass with the supplied cleaning cloth The message Clean the slit glass may be displayed if the slit glass requires cleaning When using the document processor to allow dual scanning clean the dual scanning unit also IMPORTANT Wipe the slit glasses with the dry accessory cloth Do not use water soap or solvents for cleaning 1 Remove the cloth from the cleaning cloth compartment 2 Open the d
151. at the left end of the roller 17 Put away the cleaning brush after the cleaning Close the front cover and left cover 1 by pressing specified part 9 12 OPERATION GUIDE Maintenance 18 Open the Multi Purpose Tray and remove the filters F1 and F2 19 Remove dust from the filters using a vacuum cleaner or dry cloth IMPORTANT Do not wash the filters with water Do not use the attached cleaning brush 20 Put the filters back in place and close the Multi Purpose Tray NOTE Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations OPERATION GUIDE 9 13 Maintenance 9 14 OPERATION GUIDE 10 Troubleshooting This chapter explains how to solve problems with the machine DONI MANCU NS isid 10 2 Responding to Error MessggeS nciicsndnissiicimimarianinadninesinnsmnianiends 10 6 aN Fe SPS oerni nn EE RERE S 10 15 OPERATION GUIDE 10 1 Troubleshooting Solving Malfunctions The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving If a problem occurs with your machine look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following pages If the problem persists contact your Service Representative Symptom The operation panel does not respond when the main power switch
152. ata Up to 64 characters Path Path to the receiving folder such as follows Up to 128 For example User ScanData characters Login User Name User name to access the PC Up to 64 For example abcdnet james smith characters Login Password Password to access the PC Up to 64 characters To specify a port number different from the default 139 enter using the format host name port number e g SMBhostname 140 To enter the IPv6 address enclose the address in brackets e g 3ae3 9a0 cd05 b1d2 28a 1fc0 a1 10ae 140 3 26 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation For send to folder FTP Max Data to be entered characters Host Name Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to 64 characters Path Path to the receiving folder Up to 128 For example User ScanData characters Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory Login User Name FTP server login user name Up to 64 characters Login Password FTP server login password Up to 64 characters i To specify a port number different from the default 21 enter using the format host name port number e g FTPhostname 140 To enter the IPv6 address enclose the address in brackets e g 3ae3 9a0 cd05 b1d2 28a 1fc0 a1 10ae 140 a Ready to send Destination 5 Upon completion of all entries press Connection Place original 1 Test to check the connection Folder Path Entry SMB Host Name
153. ate time while using an application you will no longer be able to use the GE application Launching Applications You can launch any application for which Activate is set Use the procedure below to launch an application 1 Press the Application key A list of available applications appears on the touch panel 2 Press the key for the application to be launched The application starts up To exit the application press X 4 When the application exit confirmation screen appears press Yes NOTE The procedure for exiting some applications may differ OPERATION GUIDE 8 61 Default Setting System Menu Deleting Applications Use the procedure below to delete an installed application IMPORTANT Always exit the application to be deleted before deleting the application Refer to Activating Deactivating Application on page 8 60 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press wv and then Application NOTE If login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Select the application to be deleted and press Delete You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail 4 When the deletion confirmation screen appears press Yes The application is dele
154. ation screen The account information is changed Ale y Cancel J l Register 08 08 2009 10 10 Deleting an account 1 Press Delete 2 Press Yes To delete the account OPERATION GUIDE 11 17 Management Managing the Copier Printer Counts You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown either the total of both or each of copying and printing individually The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11 18 Counting the Number of Pages Printed on page 11 23 and Printing an Accounting Report on page 11 26 for details Use the procedure below to set the counting methods 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting Next of Default Setting and then Change of Copier Printer Count 5 Press Total or Split 6 Press OK Restricting the Use of the Machine This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether Split or Total is selected for
155. ations of respective types Continue to enter E mail address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list Press the Start key to launch transmission to all destinations at one time 3 32 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Using Document Box What is Document Box Document Box is an area in the hard disk in which you can save documents for later retrieval or sharing among multiple users Document Box contains four types of component boxes which provide the following functions Custom Box page 6 2 Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval You can create or delete a Custom Box and manipulate data in various ways as described below e Creating a box page 6 2 Storing Documents in a Custom Box page 6 4 e Printing a Document in a Custom Box page 6 5 e Sending a Document from a Custom Box page 6 6 e Moving Copying Joining Documents in a Custom Box page 6 8 Deleting Documents in a Custom Box page 6 11 Job Box Job Box holds temporary or permanent print data for use with job options including Private Print Stored Job Quick Copy Proof and Hold Repeat copy and Form Overlay which will be discussed later Four individual Job Boxes corresponding to these job options are already provided in the Document Box These Job Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user NOTE You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in
156. ators are off In case of not using the machine for an extended period of time CAUTION If this machine will be left unused for an extended period e g overnight turn it off at the main power switch If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time e g vacation A remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution If the optional Fax kit is installed note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception CAUTION Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity 2 8 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use Sleep and Auto Sleep Sleep Power Jd Ok Auto Sleep To enter Sleep press the Power key Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save a maximum amount of power except the Main Power indicator This status is referred to as Sleep If print data is received during Sleep the print job is performed while the touch panel remains unlit When using the optional fax received fax data is printed out while the operation panel also remains unlit To resume press the Power key The machine will be ready within 15 seconds Note that ambient environmental conditions such as ventilation may cause the machine to respond more slowly Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time The default p
157. avoid damaging the data or USB memory 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Removable Memory fy Removable Memory 3 Press Remove Memory jovable Memory Date and Time 1 Document 10 10 2008 09 30 2 Document 10 10 2008 09 40 D 3 Document 10 10 2008 09 50 Memory 4 Document 10 10 2008 10 00 Information 55 Document 10 10 2008 10 05 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Remove the USB memory after Removable Memory can be safely removed is displayed OPERATION GUIDE 6 21 Document Box Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine You can store files in PDF TIFF JPEG XPS or high compression PDF format NOTE The maximum number of the storable files is 100 Storing Documents The procedure for storing documents in removable USB memory is explained below 1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot A1 IMPORTANT Use only USB memory that has been formatted on this machine If USB memory formatted on another device is used The removable memory is not formatted message may appear To format the USB memory press Format 2 When the machine reads the USB memory Removable Memory is recognized Displaying files may appear Press Yes to display the removable memory screen NOTE If the message does not appear press the Document Box key and then Removable Memory 3 Select t
158. ay 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray Tray 5 Add Shortcut Cancel amp OK 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Press OK 6 Press the Start key to start copying 4 12 OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Combine Mode This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined onto a single page 2 in 1 mode or 4 in 1 mode The page boundary of each original can be indicated NOTE Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of A3 B4 Folio A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R Ledger Legal Oficio Il 8 5x13 5 Letter Letter R Statement R 8K 16K and 16K R 2 in 1 Mode 4 For copying two originals onto a single sheet This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy four originals onto one sheet The following 2 in 1 options and output orientations are available Original Orientation of Original Platen Document processor en IIl NOTE When placing the original on the platen be sure to copy the originals in page order 4 in 1 Mode For copying four originals onto a single sheet This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy eight originals onto one sheet The following 4 in 1 options and output orientations are available Original Orientation of Original Platen Document processor iii o
159. ay Paper TA Paper jam misfeed and the machine will stop Refer to these 4 Spears the pa procedures to remove the jammed paper 2 Open the fuser cover and remove the jammed paper 3 Close the cover Ba Hold J 08 08 2009 10 10 Jam Location Indicators If a paper jam occurs the location of the jam will be displayed as the following figure with a letter corresponding to the affected component in the machine Clearing instructions will also be displayed Job Name doc101020081010 User Name Mike Paper Jam Location Indicator Paper Jam Location Reference Page Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 or 4 Option Multi Purpose Tray Inside the left cover 1 2 or 3 Duplex Unit Paper Feed Unit OPERATION GUIDE 10 15 Troubleshooting Paper Jam Location Indicator Paper Jam Location Reference Page H Document processor Option 10 25 Document finisher Option 10 25 J Built in finisher Option 10 27 K Job Separator Option 10 29 After you remove the jam the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared The machine resumes with the page which jam has occurred Precautions with Paper Jams Do not reuse jammed paper Ifthe paper tears during removal be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming e Discard paper that has jamm
160. ay not be possible in some cases Thin envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through Before purchasing envelopes in volume try testing a sample to ensure the print quality Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled Thus keep the package sealed until you are ready to use them Appendix 18 OPERATION GUIDE Keep the following points in mind Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive In addition do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is exposed after the top layer is peeled off Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes off in the machine Do not use envelopes with certain special features For example do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film covered window If paper jams occur load fewer envelopes at once To prevent paper jams when printing onto multiple envelopes do not allow more than ten envelopes remain in the output tray at once Thick Paper Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray fan it and align the edges Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams NOTE If the paper is not supplied
161. ayed when address is selected Press Detail to display the list oe Press v or A select a destination and press doc20070404131415 Detail Information on the selected job is displayed for checking Detail Job No 000081 4 To exit from the detailed information press Close 08 08 2009 10 10 7 8 OPERATION GUIDE Status Job Cancel Checking Job History Check the history of completed jobs NOTE Job history is also available by Embedded Web Server or Network Print Monitor from the computer Available Job History Screens The job histories are displayed separately in three screens Printing Jobs Sending Jobs and Storing Jobs The following job histories are available Screen Job histories to be displayed Printing Jobs e Copy e Printer e FAX reception i FAX reception e E mail reception e Printing from Document Box e Job Report List e Printing data from removable memory Sending Jobs FAX e i FAX e PC SMB FTP e E mail e Application e Multiple destination Storing Jobs e Scan e FAX e j FAX e Printer Join Box Document e Copy Box Document Displaying Job History Screen The procedure for displaying Job History Screen is explained below 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 Press either of Printing Jobs Sending Jobs or Storing Jobs to check the log and press Log Job Type All y JobNo End Date Type Job Name 000
162. ayscale Black and White Selection 0 00020 e eee eee ee eee 5 21 CONTINUOUS SCAM a eaea ad oe RP A ete eee Rea Reed Abe Det Ae ela a 5 22 Border Erase 1 2 2 2 00 ccc eee eee tenes 5 23 Border Erase to Back Page 0 0 eects 5 24 Enter Document Name File Name 0000 cette eee 5 25 Enter E mail Subject and Body 0 0 0 0 eee 5 26 WSD Sails pesien pasa aK ee ae a ae a Rae hE aE Sea E Se a eee Me we ES 5 27 Jobs Finish Notice na sorsara anus teaey ea alak ea Pee OPM ge bE Ahad owe a ees 5 29 SONG ANG PAU nie seeds anias aa aa At aie hate muta dnd alana te teen inane oA wen eines 5 30 Send and Sloe ees ke cda tease deena te aiaged due Ab wha gd aad doled anaes Pada e a we 5 30 FIP Encrypted TA 6 ceshs aves wage doe che theese we wend E cee eee ad Eee cee 5 31 Color Type eai esas stele yeas side baa chee ee aie i oa ee ea ee ees 5 31 About Color Profiles eree sarata ad aaa a a aa aaa a aE a a ae a Eea a eens 5 32 6 Document Box OPERATION GUIDE iii Contents Using a Custom Box coca nerse beta iesdvetadgbadeveiaiilas bveieiiiaevecteiian 6 2 Using a Job Box veh ises ieee doe een dls bea dae wade ye he ogee Mle ead Sie 6 12 Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory 0 0 eee eee eee 6 20 Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB 0 000 ee eee 6 22 7 Status Job Cancel Checking Job Status 105 ena deta Mac hedieeetidtad bage bene cg OE E eds 7 2 Checkin
163. b Finish Notice Sends a notice by e mail when a job is completed User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while working at a remote desk saving the time spent waiting beside the machine for copying to finish NOTE PC should be configured in advance so that E mail can be used Example of Job Finish Notice To h_pttr owl net net Subject 1234 Job end report mail Job No 000002 Result OK End Time Wed 27 Apr 2005 14 56 08 File Name doc27042005145608 Job Type Copy 1234 Use the procedure below to enable job finish notification when making copies 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Advanced Setup and then Job Finish Notice 4 To select the destination from the address book press Address Book on the left of the screen and Ready to copy Joh pinsh Notice then press Address Book in the next screen Select the destination to be notified then press OK Destination Detail You can view information on the notification destination by pressing Detail Address Book Add shortaut O cancel a 0K IS 08 08 2009 10 10 Copies To directly enter the E mail address press Address Entry Press E mail Address enter the address and press OK gem a 5 Press OK Cam 6 Press the Start key to start copying Upon completion of the job an E mail notice is sent to the selected destination Add Sho
164. bers separated by dots e g 192 168 110 171 Each number should be between 0 and 255 Appendix 28 OPERATION GUIDE IPP IPP Internet Printing Protocol is a standard that uses TCP IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be sent between remote computers and printers IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations It also supports the HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption KPDL Kyocera Page Description Language Kyocera s PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3 Multi Purpose MP Tray The paper supply tray on the right side of the machine Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto envelopes Hagaki transparencies or labels NetBEUI NetBIOS Extended User Interface An interface developed by IBM in 1985 as an update from NetBIOS It enables more advanced functions on smaller networks than other protocols such as TCP IP etc It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS 2 and Microsoft for its Windows as a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services NetWare Novell s network management software that is able to run on a variety of operating systems POP3 Post Office Proto
165. ble settings Same as Front Page front page Border Erase performed using the same setting as the Do Not Erase No Border Erase performed on the back page Use the procedure below to erase borders when sending scanned originals Destination g Ready to send Place original Border Erase Place original am Border Erase Sheet TERR iia Border Erase Lii E S Individual Original o Border Erase Zoom Paper Add Shortcut Same as Front Page Back Page 08 08 2009 10 10 Destination a4 Ready to send Place original Border Erase ofe 0 00 2 00 od gos PES he a etom 0 25 rim Left 0 25 Front Page Back Page Top Edge Top Front as maybe Erase Book 5 Individual C Right 0 25 Border Erase i n EN Original Orientation Cancel OK 08 08 2009 10 10 Add Shortcut 1 2 3 4 Press the Send key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup and then Border Erase Press Border Erase Sheet to erase borders for an individual sheet or Border Erase Book to erase borders for a book Use or to enter the width in Border or Gutter Press Keys to use the number keys for entry Press Individual Border Erase to select the individual border erase Use or to enter the border width or press Keys and enter the width using the numeric keys Press Origin
166. bs By pressing this key again the printing jobs will be resumed Cancel Select the job to be canceled from the list and press this key Priority Override Select the job to be overridden and press this key Refer to Priority Override for Waiting Jobs on page 7 14 Move Up In the list select the job that you want to move up the job queue and press this key Refer to Reordering Print Jobs on page 7 14 Detail Select the job for displaying detailed information from the list and press this key Refer to Checking the Detailed Information of Histories on page 7 10 7 4 OPERATION GUIDE Status Job Cancel Sending Jobs Status screen Status Scheduled Job Log 2 CD a Job No 1 Accepted Time Type Job Name User Name Status g abc def com InProcess Storing Jobs Device Paper Supplies a 08 08 2009 10 10 Item Key Job No Acceptance No of job Accepted Time Accepted Time of job Icons that indicate the job type Sending Job FAX Ne mSending Job i FAX Sending Job PC SMB FTP E ESending Job E mail ESending Job Application m ESending Job Multiple f Destination Destination Either destination name FAX number E mail address or server name User Name User Name for the executed job Status Status of job InProcess The status before starting sending such as during scanning originals Sending Sending Waiting Sending
167. cally cleared Print overrun Memory is full Auto Error Clear ON OFF Select whether to use Auto Error Clear or not Use the procedure below to specify the auto error clear setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Date Timer and then Change of Auto Error Clear 3 Press Off or On 4 Press OK Error Clear Timer If you select On for Auto Error Clear set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors Options are between 5 and 495 seconds every five seconds NOTE If you select Off for Auto Error Clear the time display does not appear OPERATION GUIDE 8 49 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to set the automatic error clear delay 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Date Timer v and then Change of Error Clear Timer 3 Press or to enter the time until printing restarts You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value 4 Press OK Interrupt Clear Timer Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal mode when it has been set to Interrupt Copy mode and then left unused Any period between 5 and 495 seconds in five second increments can be set The procedure for setting the interrupt clear timer is explained below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Date Timer v and then Change of Interrupt Clear Timer 3 Press or to enter the time for the interrupt clear timer 4 Press OK 8 50 OPER
168. cated size A4 B5 A5 B6 A6 16K Letter B B Statement A A Original Paper Vertical direction For the originals paper dimension A is longer than B A4 R B5 R A5 R B6 R A6 R 16K B B A R Letter R Statement R A Original Paper Horizontal direction For the originals paper dimension A is shorter than B j The size of the original paper that can be used depends on the function and source tray For further details refer to the page detailing that function or source tray Icons on the Touch Panel The following icons are used to indicate originals and paper placement directions on the touch panel Placement direction Originals Vertical direction Horizontal direction xxviii OPERATION GUIDE 1 Part Names This chapter identifies the machine parts and operation panel keys OPSION PAIN pa E Ei s MACRO cirmi eiea OPERATION GUIDE 1 1 Part Names Operation Panel Displays the Status Job Cancel screen Displays the System Menu Displays number of sheets printed and number of pages scanned Displays help guidance Blinks during printing operation Blinks while data is transmitted System Menu Counter Help Somi Send Q Status Job Cancel Copy Ee Program gt Applica
169. ccessfully established E mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E mail that can be sent in kilobytes When the value is O the limitation for E mail size is disabled Sender Address Signature Enter the E mail address of the person responsible for the machine such as the machine administrator so that a reply or non delivery report will go to a person rather than to the machine The sender address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication The maximum length of the sender address is 128 characters Enter the signature The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of the E mail body It is often used for further identification of the machine The maximum length of the signature is 512 characters Domain Restriction 3 Click Submit Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected The maximum length of the domain name is 32 characters You can also specify E mail addresses 2 18 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use Loading Paper Paper can be loaded standardly in the two cassettes and the multi purpose tray A paper feeder is also available as an option refer to Optional Equipment on Appendix 2 Before Loading Paper When you open a new package of paper fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps 1 Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the middle 2 Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while keeping
170. ce all originals and press Continue Replace the waste toner box Remove originals from the document processor put them back in their original order and place them again Press Continue to resume printing Press Cancel to cancel the job The waste toner box is full Replace the waste toner box Remove all originals in the document processor Are there any originals left in the document processor Remove originals from the document processor Scanner memory is full Scanning cannot be performed due to insufficient memory of scanner Only one copy of the scanned pages is available Press Continue to print send or store the scanned pages Press Cancel to cancel the printing job OPERATION GUIDE 10 9 Troubleshooting Error Message Send error Checkpoints Corrective Actions An error has occurred during transmission Refer to Responding to Send Error for the error code and corrective actions Reference Page Set the waste toner box The waste toner box is not installed correctly Set it correctly Staple jam If a staple jam occurs the machine will stop and the location of the jam will be indicated on the touch panel Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to remove the jammed staple System error System error has occurred Confirm that the Attention indicator is lighting and then turn the main power switch off and on
171. ce san bead Gea seeded Cee ace PEE One 2 15 Embedded Web Server Settings for E mail 20 0000 c cece eee eee 2 16 sending E Malll cca Jeschd peerage cee e aaa eee wea e he ee gals a eas 2 17 Loading Paper coc ete iretur EE a yh Api iieiea tee nite lide Pee eines 2 19 Loading OnGinalS e eeraa had dada a ard AAA e ah ete Raced atcne 2 30 3 Basic Operation LOGIN LOGOUU esea a dag r pancho anata hear ee ae eee eas 3 2 Enter key and Quick No Search key 000 c cee eae 3 3 louch Panel Displayen cieta rerep aada iia a Rae pee Bed hee Ree eee Ado 3 4 Original Preview essa ss hanuwsgdreieee ESEE EERENS ENARE Deg ad eee Peden y 3 5 COPYING ase late tee ee no ei eaala oe eee ahaa tales weal dak 3 6 Printing Printing from Applications 0 0 0 teas 3 21 SONGING ectoreeioengieehtadoatduasaddiwpdene i edad heeds Abd da Dae ad 3 23 Confirmation Screen of Destinations 0 0 0 0 eee eee 3 29 Specifying Destination s rear i bee eee bette need 3 30 Using Document BOK sos evans chad Gx badd eed hae eee Rae eae elle ae Yea ee 3 33 Basic Operation for Document Box 000 eee eee eee 3 35 Canceling dobs eessen eona pee ESPARTAREN EREE ERSA vee Tyee Hae Beda ee eae 3 42 Quick Setup Screen siemenen Wk e Peal eM eae dene a a nade dame subeals arenes 3 43 Program Copying and Sending 00 cece eee tees 3 46 Registering Shortcuts Copy Send and Document Box Settings 04 3 48 Using
172. cified sending size NOTE When zooming in or out see Sending Size Selection on page 5 3 when selecting the sending size Depending on the combination of original size and sending size the image is placed at the edge of the paper To center the image vertically and horizontally on the page use the centering setting described in Centering on page 5 6 Use the procedure below to enlarge or reduce the original to match the transmission size 1 Press the Send key Place the originals on the platen Select the transmission size Press Advanced Setup and then Zoom a Ready to send eN Press 100 or Auto Place original O a A WO N Press OK Enlarge or reduce original when scanning 100 Scan at actual size Auto Enlarge or reduce to match sending size storing size 100 Add Shortcut 08 08 2009 10 10 7 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending OPERATION GUIDE 5 5 Sending Functions Centering When you have scanned the original after specifying the original size and sending size depending on these sizes a margin is created at the bottom left or right side of paper By using the centering the image is placed with a margin equally created at each of the page Top Bottom and Left Right Use the procedure below to center then image when sending a scanned image 1 ao oa fF WO N Press the Send key Place the originals on the platen Pr
173. cify an address number that is already in use an error message appears when you press Register and the number cannot be registered If you set 0000 as the address number the address is registered under the lowest available number 5 Press OK The screen shown in step 3 reappears 6 Press Change of Name 7 Enter the destination name up to 32 characters to be displayed on the Address Book and press OK The screen shown in step 3 reappears NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 lt blue gt for details on entering characters 8 Press E mail to add an e mail address SMB to add a folder on the computer or FTP to add an FTP folder The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected OPERATION GUIDE 8 51 Default Setting System Menu E mail Address Press Change of E mail Address enter the E mail address and press OK The table below explains the items to be entered NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 lt blue gt for details on entering characters The Folder FTP Address Press Change of Host Name Path Login User Name and Login Password enter the information for each item and press OK The table below explains the items to be entered Max No of Description Characters Host Name FTP server host name or IP address 64 chars Path Path for the file to be stored e g User ScanData 128 chars If no path is en
174. ck streaks appear on the printouts or scanned data perform automatic cleaning of the main chargers If no black line appears at the ends of the paper margin refer to Correcting Fine Black Lines on page 8 44 GE 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Adjustment Maintenance and then Change of Charger Auto Cleaning 3 Press Yes Automatic cleaning of the main charger starts and ends in about 45 seconds 4 Once the cleaning ends return to the Adjustment Maintenance screen Auto Color Correction This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether the original is color or black and white during Auto Color Mode Setting a lower value will result in more originals being identified as color while a larger value will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and white Use the procedure below to set the Auto Color Detection Level 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Adjustment Maintenance v and then Change of Auto Color Correction 3 Press one of keys 1 to 5 Color B amp W to set the detection level 4 Press OK OPERATION GUIDE 8 45 Default Setting System Menu Gray Adjustment After prolonged use or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity the hue of printed color output may shift or color drift may occur Use this function to correct color settings when the color of a finished copy does not match the orig
175. cludes the battery that complies with the European Parliament and Council Directive 2006 66 EC the Battery Directive in European Union Do not remove and dispose of the batteries included in this machine xvi OPERATION GUIDE Legal Restriction on Copying Scanning e It may be prohibited to copy scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner e Copying Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low It may not be limited to these items Do not knowingly copy scan the items that are not to be copied scanned Paper money Bank note Securities Stamp Passport Certificate e Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying scanning of other items not mentioned above OPERATION GUIDE xvii xviii OPERATION GUIDE Legal and Safety Information Please read this information before using your machine This chapter provides information on the following topics Legal RTT eI sosiaa XX Regatdmo Tade NIMES Renan ee tate reste e rehech ona tere xxi Energy Saving Control FUNCION cis icssisonsisniarndcsiinaiimanledniechiaianinindniedan XXV Automatic 2 Sided Copy FUNCHOM jisssccssessesssecevseers cate cecsaesevnnetsieaszeas XXV Faper IRGC cih aceasi aii Eia XXV Energy Star ENERGY STAR Program ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees XXV About this Operation GUdEresuscrsesnie xxvi OPERATION GUIDE xix Legal Information Copying or other reproduction of al
176. col 3 A standard protocol to receive E mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet PostScript A page description language developed by Adobe Systems It enables flexible font functions and highly functional graphics allowing higher quality printing The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985 followed by Level 2 that enabled color printing and two byte languages e g Japanese in 1990 In 1996 Level 3 was released as an update for the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies PPM prints per minute This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute Printer Driver The software to enable you to print data created on any application software The printer driver for the machine is contained in the CD ROM enclosed in the package Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine RA Stateless The IPv6 router communicates transmits information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv 6 This information is the Router Advertisement RA ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol and is a IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 Internet Control Message Protocol ICMPv6 for the Internet Protocol Version 6 IPv6 Specification OPERATION GUIDE Appendix 29 Send as E mail A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E mail attachment E mail addresses can be
177. comes lower when using Off On High Correction performed Select this item if black streak remains after using On Low The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using On Low NOTE Using Correcting Fine Black Line can impair reproduction of fine characters It is recommended to keep the default Off Use the procedure below to specify the setting for correcting fine black lines 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Adjustment Maintenance and then Change of Correcting Black Line 3 Press Off On Low or On High 4 Press OK System Initialization Initialize the hard disk mounted on the machine to return to the default mode Refer to System Initialization on page 8 63 about the initialization procedures Display Brightness Set the brightness of the touch panel Use the procedure below to adjust the display brightness 1 Press the System Menu key 8 44 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu 2 Press Adjustment Maintenance and then Change of Display Brightness 3 Press 1 4 Darker Lighter to adjust brightness 4 Press OK Silent Mode Make the machine run more quietly Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable Use the procedure below to set Silent mode 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Adjustment Maintenance and then Change of Silent Mode 3 Press Off or On 4 Press OK Charger Auto Cleaning If bla
178. correctly even after it is smoothed load the paper in the multi purpose tray with the leading edge raised a few millimeters Label Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray For selecting labels use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure When printing onto labels you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected by the force applied in the machine Top sheet The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is I Adhesive layer used This composition of labels may cause more Carrier sheet problems The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels resulting in a serious failure OPERATION GUIDE Appendix 19 Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet When using such paper do not peel these margins from the carrier sheet before completing output Allowed Not allowed lt t Top sheet Carrier sheet Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications Item Specifications Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g m Basis weight 104 to 151 g m ov
179. counts together at the same time Use the procedure below to check and reset the counter 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password OPERATION GUIDE 11 23 Management 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting and then Next of Total Job Accounting ae ee 5 Press Check at the function to check the count tee ae Se The results will be displayed gt nE FAX Transmission Time 6 Confirm the count and press Close 2 00 00 10 Press Execute of Counter Reset to reset the counter 8 Press Yes on the screen to confirm the reset The Counter Reset Execute A ial counter is reset 08 08 2009 10 10 Each Job Accounting Resetting the Counter This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account Use the procedure below to display and reset the counter 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the
180. creen reappears NOTE You can specify preferences such as the way the Internet browser screen is displayed For details refer to Internet Browser Setup page 8 58 OPERATION GUIDE 3 49 Basic Operation Using the Browser Screen The operations available in the Internet browser screen are shown below Search box Pressing the text box displays a keyboard You can then perform a search by entering a keyword and pressing the Search Title bar Displays the page title OFFICE RETAL BUSINESS Close Closes the Internet browser and returns you to the application list screen Scroll bars These allow you to scroll the displayed page up down left and right by pressing A v lt Jor gt or by moving one of the slide bars with your finger Security lock icon Displayed when you are viewing a protected page InsenireWRL Carica Menu Lre T A E M M Shows the status of page loading When the browser is loading a web page the loader changes to an animated display TEUS Loader Progress bar Menu Displays the browser setup menu You can use this menu to specify the browser s display magnification set the text encoding scheme and check the server certificate Search Search Internet Retrieval in page Enter URL Displays a search menu in which you can select Retrieval Use this display a desired web in page or an Internet search site page by enterin
181. d 495 seconds Use the procedure below to set the form feed timeout 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer v and Change of Form Feed Timeout 3 Press or to set the Form Feed Timeout You can set the timeout delay in seconds You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value 4 Press OK LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code character code OAH The table below shows the available settings LF Only Only line feed performed LF andCR Line feed and character return performed Ignore LF No line feed performed OPERATION GUIDE 8 37 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to specify an LF action 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer v and Change of LF Action 3 Press LF Only LF and CR or Ignore LF 4 Press OK CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code character code ODH The table below shows the available settings Item Description CR Only Only character return performed LF andCR Character return and line feed performed Ignore CR No character return performed Use the procedure below to specify a CR action 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer v and Change of CR Action 3 Press CR Only LF and CR or Ignore CR 4 Press OK Paper Feed Mode While printing from the computer select how to feed pape
182. d 50 NOTE If you enter a value of 0 zero no jobs are stored 4 Press OK The maximum number of stored jobs is set 08 08 2009 10 10 You can print the documents stored in the Repeat Copy box Use the procedure below to print a document Print Press the Document Box key Press Job Box Select Repeat Copy box and press Open Select the document to print and press Print 5 If the document is protected by a password enter the password using the numeric keys 6 Press Start Print to start printing The Repeat Copy box job will be deleted when the main power switch is turned off 6 16 OPERATION GUIDE Document Box Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents This setting specifies that documents such as Private Printing Quick Copying or Proof and Hold Printing saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time The table below shows the available settings Item Detail Temporary documents are not automatically deleted However the temporary documents will be deleted when the power is turned off 1 hour Documents are deleted after 1 hour 4 hours Documents are deleted after 4 hours 1 day Documents are deleted after 1 day 1 week Documents are deleted after 1 week Use the procedure below to set automatic deletion for temporary documents 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Document Bo
183. d that the room be properly ventilated Power supply Grounding the machine A WARNING Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified Avoid multiple connections in the same outlet These types of situations present a danger of fire or electrical shock Plug the power cord securely into the mains power outlet and the power socket on the machine A buildup of dust around the prongs on the plug or contact between the prongs and metallic objects may cause a fire or electric shock Incomplete electrical contact could cause overheating and ignition Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock in case of an electric short If an earth connection is not possible contact your service representative Other precautions Connect the power plug to the closest outlet possible to the machine Handling of plastic bags A WARNING Keep the plastic bags that are used with the machine away from children The plastic may cling to their nose and mouth causing suffocation OPERATION GUIDE xi Precautions for Use Cautions when using the machine A WARNING Do not place metallic objects or containers with water flower vases flower pots cups etc on or near the machine This type of situation presents a danger of fire or electrical shock should they fall inside Do not remove any of the covers from the machine as there is a danger of electric
184. der Erase Specify border erase widths individually for all edges Original In each option the available ranges are as below Input units e Border Erase Range Inch Models 0 to 2 in 0 01 increments Metric Models 0 mm to 50 mm in 1 mm increments NOTE To specify the default width value of Border Erase refer to Border Erase Default on page 8 20 for details OPERATION GUIDE 4 17 Copying Functions Border Erase to Back Page When scanning a 2 sided original this allows you to erase the borders on the back of the original The table below shows the available settings Item Detail Same as Front Page Border Erase performed using the same setting as the front page Do Not Erase No Border Erase performed on the back page NOTE You can change the default setting for Border Erase to Back Page For details refer to Paper Selection on page 8 26 Use the procedure below to erase borders when copying Ready to copy Border Erase 0 75 0 75 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Layout Edit and then Border Erase 4 Select Border Erase Sheet to erase borders for an individual sheet or Border Erase Book to erase borders for a book Copies Use or to enter the width in Border or Gutter Place original m porer Erase el e mo Border Erase J fi lini Ben J 0 75 0 75 N Original f In
185. dividual 25 Zoom gt 100 m Border Erase Paper Same as Press Keys to use the numeric keys for entry Front Page Back Page Add Shortcut Cancel Ready to copy Border Erase aa 0 00 2 00 a ec Place original E poe me ml Bottom 0 25 PE ae th Left 0 25 a E Zoom 100 aoe BEE LEE eee P 08 08 2009 10 10 Copies Press Individual Border Erase to select the individual border erase Use or to enter the width in Top Bottom Left or Right Press Keys to use the numeric keys for Same as entry Front Page Back Page Press Original Orientation to select the original EESE orientation from either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Then press OK Add Shortcut Cancel For 2 sided originals press Back Page and then press Same as Front Page or Do Not Erase 5 Press OK 6 Press the Start key to start copying 4 18 OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Booklet from Sheets The Booklet copying option allows you to copy sheet originals and produce booklets such as small brochures or pamphlets A booklet such as a magazine is made by folding at the center You can copy the cover page onto colored paper or thick paper Paper for the cover is supplied from the multi purpose tray To feed the cover paper from the cassette refer to Paper Source for Cover Paper on page 8 10 NOTE Using the optional 3 000 shee
186. dress and press OK Press OK Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending When the sending is completed the finish notice is sent to the specified E mail address OPERATION GUIDE 5 29 Sending Functions Send and Print When you send originals this feature allows you to print a copy of the document being sent The procedure for using Send and Print is explained below 1 Press the Send key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup and then Send and Print Press On Press OK ao oa A WO N Specify the destination and press the Start key Transmission begins and a copy of the transmitted document is printed Send and Store When you send originals this feature allows you to store a copy of the document being sent in a Custom Box The procedure for using Send and Store is explained below 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Advanced Setup v and then Send and Store a Ready to send ED 4 Press On Place original Send and Store 5 Select the Custom Box in which the copy is to be stored 96 Boxoo1 If a password entry screen for the Custom Box 07 BOxtO appears enter the password 08 BOX003 09 BOX004 You can view information on the selected Custom 10 B0x005 Box by pressing Detail MEE 6 Press OK 08 08 2009 10 10 7 Specify the destination and press the Start key Transmission
187. e OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 Protocol Detail The table below lists the network related function settings The network related functions are available when TCP IP is On NetBEUI Description Selects whether or not to receive documents using NetBEUI Default Setting Restarting the System LPD Select whether or not to receive documents using LPD as the network protocol SMTP E mail TX Select whether or not to send e mail using SMTP POP3 E mail RX Select whether or not to receive e mail using POP3 FTP Client Transmission Select whether or not to send documents using FTP When selecting On set the FTP Port Number Use the FTP default port 21 FTP Server Reception Select whether or not to receive documents using FTP On SMB Client Transmission Select whether or not to send documents using SMB When selecting On set the SMB default Port Number Use the SMB default port 139 For Windows Vista use 445 On Port 139 i FAX Select whether or not to use i FAX On LDAP Select whether or not to use LDAP SNMP Select whether or not to communicate using SNMP SNMPv3 Select whether or not to communicate using SNMPv3 Select whether or not to communicate using HTTP 8 66 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Men
188. e before setting the date and time If you change Date Time setting trial functions will be unavailable For details refer to Optional Functions on page 8 75 1 Press the System Menu key ystem Menu 2 Press v Date Timer and then Change of Time Zone 3 Select the region Date Timer Time Zone ij Set time zone LS Select the location nearest you NOTE Press A or v to view the next region Time Zone 12 00 International Date Line West Bina tle Belen 4 Press Off or On of Summer Time and press OK 10 00 Hawaii 09 00 Alaska a Tas CEA ree NOTE If you select a region that does not utilize COAR summer time the summer time setting screen will not appear 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Press Change of Date Time 6 Set the date and time Press or in each setting Date Timer Date Time ij Set the date and time 7 Press OK 2008 v ioke V o ARARA R AE ral a Cancel a OK 08 08 2009 10 10 OPERATION GUIDE 2 11 Preparation before Use Network Setup LAN Cable Connection The machine is equipped with network interface which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP IP IPv4 TCP IP IPv6 IPX SPX NetBEUI IPSec and AppleTalk It enables network printing on the Windows Macintosh UNIX NetWare and other platforms This section explains the TCP IP IPv4 Setup and AppleTalk Setup procedures For other network
189. e into the document processor as far as it will go The original placement indicator will be lit IMPORTANT Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals If there is a gap readjust the original width guides The gap may cause the originals to jam Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator Exceeding the maximum level may cause the originals to jam see the figure Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way that the holes or perforations will be scanned last not first The original placement indicator is lit or unlit depending on how originals are placed Indications and their status are as follows Green left indicator lit Original is placed properly Green left indicator blinking Original is not placed properly Remove and place again Red right indicator blinking Original is jammed Remove the jammed original and place it properly OPERATION GUIDE 2 33 Preparation before Use 2 34 OPERATION GUIDE 3 Basic Operation This chapter explains the following operations See sonop eE E 3 2 Enter key and Quick No Search Key sscciissvinsiciiostnresnectatatirdonsnumanieaiien 3 2 gt FOGN anel Oia ay irrena rana EERE 3 4 ROA Prov O Wannen aii i Riria 3 5 COIN eea 3 6 Printing Printing from ADDI CANONS sisi ditniiasivisinstainiessiccsdenonensensiendn 3 21 gt Tess NO A deus E EE A A oda A EE 3 23 BOSH OSS
190. e left cover 1 OPERATION GUIDE 10 27 Troubleshooting 6 Re attach the output tray 7 Lower the finisher process tray 8 Remove the paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 9 Raise the finisher process tray 10 28 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting Job Separator Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional job separator Remove any paper in the output section 1 If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 2 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open left cover 1 3 Remove the paper remove every loose scrap from 4 0 If the paper tears inside the machine 4 Press the indicated position to close left cover 1 wl a 10 29 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting 10 30 OPERATION GUIDE 11 Management This chapter explains the following operations ADS LOGI Administrati ieis irsidir enisi 11 2 JODACCOUNMUN koreane eea 11 14 Data Securty Kt rN cncaro 11 27 OPERATION GUIDE 11 1 Management User Login Administration User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine Enter correct login user name and password for user authentication to login Access are in three levels User Administrator and Machine Administrator The security levels can be modified
191. e present status Access Level Account Name Detail User 02Account 2 E mail Address Change IC Card Information ___abcd efg com 2 Empty Cancel J ie Register 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Press Register to finalize changed user properties 11 8 OPERATION GUIDE Management Unknown login user name Job This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown login user names or User ID i e unsent IDs If the User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown The table below shows the available settings C a a Reject The job is rejected not printed Permit The job is permitted to be printed Use the procedure below to process jobs sent from unknown users 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Change of Unknown ID Job Press Reject or Permit 6 Press OK OPERATION GUIDE 11 9 Management Group Authorization Settings Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server NOTE To use the group authorization settings Ne
192. e procedure below to select the language 1 2 3 4 Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings and then Change of Language Press the key for the language you want to use Press OK The touch panel language will be changed Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start up default screen The options are as follows The table below lists the available screens Item Description Copy The Copy screen the screen shown when the Copy key is pressed appears Send The Send screen the screen shown when the Send key is pressed appears Status The Status Job Cancel screen the screen shown when the Status Job Cancel key is pressed appears 8 2 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Item Description Document Box The Document Box screen the screen shown when the Document Box key is pressed appears Program The Program screen the screen shown when the Program key is pressed appears Application The Application selecting screen the screen shown when the Application key is pressed appears Accessibility Copy The Accessibility Copy screen the screen shown when the Accessibility Display key is pressed in the Copy screen appears Accessibility Send The Accessibility Send screen the screen shown when the Accessibility Display key is pressed in the Send screen appears Application name Each application is activated and the initial screen appe
193. e that SMB Protocol or FTP in the Embedded Web Server is On For details refer to the Embedded Web Server Operation Guide 1 Press the Send key Displays the screen for sending NOTE Depending on the settings the address book screen may appear In this event press Cancel to display the screen for sending 2 Press Folder Path Entry and then SMB or FTP NOTE Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One Touch Keys For details refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 30 OPERATION GUIDE 3 25 Basic Operation a Ready to send Destination 3 Enter host name path login user name and login Preci 1 password Press the key of each item to first display the entry screen Host Name Path Login User Name Add to Addr Book Next Dest Cancel 08 08 2009 10 10 Use the keyboard to enter Lifhit 128 characters IrJput Ocharacters Lale elle aada a JES ACS a VCS EA ER EN E ES a S a Lie E e EG Lower case No Symbol Space Cancel J l 4 Enter the destination data and press OK 08 08 2009 10 10 Data to be entered are as follows NOTE You will be unable to send the data if you forget your login user name or login password Contact your administrator and check your login user name or login password For send to folder SMB Max Data to be entered characters Host Name Host name or IP address of the PC to receive the d
194. e the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose MP Tray return it to its original package and reseal it xiv OPERATION GUIDE Laser Safety Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body For this reason laser radiation emitted inside this machine is hermetically sealed within the p rotective housing and external cover In the normal operation of the product by user no radiation can leak from the machine This machine is classified as Class 1 laser Caution Performance of procedures other exposure product under IEC 60825 than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area DANGER ATTENTION VORSICHT ATTENZIONE PRECAUCION VARO Ee A EER r CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM CLASE 3B RAYONNEMENT LASER EN CAS D OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU KLASSE 3B LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNE NIGHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN CLASSE 3B RADIAZIONE LASER IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO CLASSE 3B RADIACIONE LASER CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LUOKAN 3B LASERSATEILYLLE ALA KATSO SATEESEEN AFRABAR mR HART RSARIES THER ICR Ht PEGS RAE THETRAA RR EZERA CLASS 3B 74 HOAHAHS AY HRAS TORMCK LISAIBL V HNTET E LSERRID MIELEC EEL The
195. e the procedure below 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Custom Box select the box containing the document you want to overlay the image into and print and then press Open NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password 3 Select the document you wish to print by checking the checkbox Search wame The document is marked with a checkmark 10 10 2008 09 50 21 MB 10 10 2008 10 00 21 MB NOTE To deselect press the checkbox again and al remove the checkmark Preview Join Move Copy Delete Store File 4 Press P rin t d Close 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Press Functions Form Overlay Select Stored Ready to store in Box File Name Form and then Select Form NOTE You can change the form density setting through 10 levels from 10 to 100 Press the or buttons in Density 08 08 2009 10 10 6 In Form Overlay Select Form select the image file to be overlaid onto the document from the displayed document boxes You can only select one image file 7 Press OK Press OK again to return to the Functions screen Press the Start key Printing begins OPERATION GUIDE 6 7 Document Box Editing Documents This function allows you to move or copy documents stored in custom boxes into other boxes or to join multiple documents together You can also copy documents to USB memory connected to this m
196. e the size lever B up C or down I C metric size centimeters A B sizes linch size 4 Turn the size switch 90 to lock it 6 4 Align the paper flush against the left side of the cassette IMPORTANT e Before loading the paper be sure that it is not curled or folded Paper that is curled or folded may cause paper jams Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator see illustration below When loading the paper keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up The paper length and width guides must be adjusted to the paper size Loading the paper without adjusting these guides may cause skewed feeding and paper jams e Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely against the paper If there is a gap readjust the guides to fit the paper OPERATION GUIDE 2 21 2 Preparation before Use 5 Insert the appropriate paper size card in the slot to indicate the size of the paper inside 6 Gently push the cassette back in NOTE If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag 7 Select the media type plain recycled etc loaded in the cassette Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2 26 Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray The multi purpose tray will hold
197. ecking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Papet 7 15 me ese gel ay tae 2 1 1 eee ie ee ee outer eee a 7 16 OPERATION GUIDE 7 1 Status Job Cancel Checking Job Status Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed Available Status Screens The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Sending Jobs Timer waiting and Storing Jobs The following job statuses are available Screen Job statuses to be displayed Printing Jobs Copy Printer FAX reception i FAX reception E mail reception Printing from Document Box Job Report List Printing data from removable memory Sending Jobs FAX transmission i FAX transmission PC SMB FTP transmission E mail Application Multiple destination Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission Storing Jobs Displaying Status Screens Scan FAX i FAX Printer Join Box Document Copy Box Document Use the procedure below to display the Status screen 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 The Status screen appears Press either of Printing Jobs Sending Jobs or Storing Jobs to check the status To check the scheduled transmission job press Sending Jobs and then Scheduled Job For an explanation of the screen refer to Details of the Status Screens on page 7 3 Paper Supplie
198. ed every destination 3 Press the Start key to start sending OPERATION GUIDE 3 29 Basic Operation Specifying Destination When specifying destination choose from the Address Book or use the One Touch Keys NOTE You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you press the Send key For details refer to Setting the Default Send Screen on page 8 31 Choosing from the Address Book Select a destination registered in the Address Book El Ready to send Destination 1 In the basic screen for sending press Address Place original 3 Boo k Destination i Detail A Address g ABCD abcd efg com Book f E mail TUVW 10 200 188 120 Auto ai agar Enty Groupi Groupi Vv Folder Path e Entry On Hook Direct l Chain J Detail Edit Delete J Recall le FAX No Entry 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 jo Hee Entry 0006 0007 E aj 0009 0010 a 1 100 g WSD Sean Destination Quick Setup rohnal Sending fe oe ow 2009 10 10 2 Press the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list You may choose multiple destinations The selected destinations are SearcyName indicated by a checkmark in the check box To use SearchiNo an address book on the LDAP server select Ext cre Address Book from the Addr Book pull down Group2 Group3 petai menu pec EE Ji en J J mmo J pors rw Jiwo os You can change the order in which the destinations par jpe je Ke
199. ed in the optional document finisher A page affected by a paper jam will be printed again CAUTION The fixing unit is extremely hot Take sufficient care when working in this area as there is a danger of getting burned Cassette 1 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 1 1 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover 1 2 Remove any paper 10 16 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting 3 Pullout cassette 1 4 Remove the paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 5 Push cassette 1 back in place securely 6 Press the specified position to close left cover 1 Cassette 2 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 2 1 Open left cover 2 OPERATION GUIDE 10 17 Troubleshooting 2 Remove any paper 3 Pullout cassette 2 4 Remove the paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 5 Push cassette 2 back in place securely 6 Close left cover 2 Optional Cassettes 3 and 4 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassettes 3 or 4 when using the optional paper feeder 1 Open left cover 3 10 18 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting 2 Remove any paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 3 Pull out the cassette in use 4 Remove the paper
200. ee 8 63 Restarting the System coses srsr serrait i drd ee eee 8 63 N WOrk Setups 3x aa kewaent dated a a hay oe ma ata ye a a a a O A 8 64 Secure PIOlOCOl ey a cnet d ee pa a ade ated E E he dee ded a aed Peake nee PRS 8 69 Interface Block Setting 2 e4 20 eres eee eee eb eee be eee bE eye bebe eee eee 8 72 Security Level Security Level setting 0 0 0 cece eee 8 73 Document Guard Seting osr ssir arera Saka EEEN EEEa a aa aa A 8 73 Optional FUNCIONS csse amara dapra eRe eee aE Sea eE k RUR a REG Ewe eR ee 8 75 Accessibility Display Enlarged Touch Panel Display 2 22200 eee eaee 8 77 9 Maintenance CIGANING 4 230 5 tiv re Aa A oe tad ayes Rad oewen eee ad eee ead a ean eas 9 2 Toner Container and Waste Toner Box Replacement 2 22020 cece eeeee 9 8 10 Troubleshooting solving Malfunctions sss raresa ra nr ra po dadwee does abe eae baad EE ERARAS 10 2 Responding to Error Messages 0 00 cece tee ttn 10 6 Clearing Paper Jams 2 6620 cae ee ae oe ee ea eee ee ee 10 15 11 Management User Login Administration 0 0 0 0 00 cbt eee 11 2 JOD ACCOUN site is sen acd apace peed dd Sed ge a eee oe eds Pea awe neha e week ef 11 14 Data Security Kit Operations 0 0 0 ett 11 27 Appendix Optional Equipment 0000 eee Appendix 2 iv OPERATION GUIDE Contents Character Entry Method 0 000 cece ett eee Appendix 10 Papelaan See paceea ba aue ee AY
201. egistering the copying function 1 Press the Program key while the copy mode is accessed 2 Press Register and press a number 01 to 50 for the program number If entering Program screen from the Copy screen or Send screen go to step 4 NOTE If you select a program number already registered the currently registered functions can be replaced with a new set of functions Check that Copy is selected and press Next 4 Enter the new program name and press Register to register the program Recalling Programs Use the procedure below to recall a registered program 1 Press the Program key 2 Press Recall and press the key corresponding to the program number 01 to 50 to recall Press the Quick No Search key or No to enter the program number directly for recalling BE Program recalling NOTE If the program cannot be recalled the Document Box or the form overlay specified in the program might have been deleted Check the Document Box 08 08 2009 10 10 3 Place the originals and press the Start key Copying is performed according to the registered program 3 46 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Editing and Deleting Programs You can change program number and program name or delete program Use the procedure below to edit or delete a program 1 Press the Program key 2 Press Edit and press the key s corresponding to the program number 01 to 50 to change or delete 3 Toedit a
202. elect Top Left Top Middle Top Right Bottom Left Bottom Middle or Bottom Right as the page numbering position Original Use the procedure below to insert page numbers on your copies 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen Press Layout Edit and then Page Ready to copy Copies 4 Select the numbering format from 1 P 1 or 1 n Auto Select the page numbering position 3 Last Page To start page numbering from a page other than the en Ee 1 355 Deno first page press or of 1st Page and select the 1 1 starting page You can also enter the number with J eee the numeric keys after pressing Keys Key Keys Orientation cancel a ok 08 08 2009 10 10 7 Tostart the numbering with a number other than 1 press or of Start Number and enter the starting number You can also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing Keys 8 If you do not want page numbering through to the last page press Last Page Select Manual and use or to enter the final page to be numbered a negative number of pages counting backwards from the last page Then press OK You can seta value up to 10 You can also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing Keys OPERATION GUIDE 4 23 Copying Functions 9 The total numb
203. en the optional internet fax kit is installed You can set this function up so that destination types are selected when the address book is displayed For more information refer to Narrow Down Settings on page 8 57 The procedures for using the different search modes are explained below Search by name Press Search Name and enter the required name Search by address number Press Search No and enter the address number you wish to search Advanced search by initial letter Press the key for the required initial letter Advanced search by destination Press any of E mail Folder FAX i FAX or Group The destinations registered by that type are displayed OPERATION GUIDE 3 31 Basic Operation Choosing by One Touch Key a Ready to send De Select the destination using the One Touch Keys Place original Destination I petal Ja Adress i In the basic screen for sending press the One Touch abcd efg com eee ee o Ema Keys where the destination is registered Groupi Groupi lo Folder Path Entry onno J piret Jl cran Jf peaweat Jf dete J recan NOTE If the One Touch Keys for the desired 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 xy destination is hidden on the touch panel press v or gt les A haaren A to scroll and view next or previous One Touch 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 S g WD San Keys 5 ci ie i This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have Tage Oualty aw already been regist
204. enu Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode The table below shows the available settings Description Finish 1 sided No duplex mode 2 sided Bind Shorter edge bound ShortEdge 2 sided Bind Longer edge bound LongEdge Use the procedure below to select a duplex setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer and Change of Duplex 3 Press 1 sided 2 sided Bind LongEdge or 2 sided Bind ShortEdge 4 Press OK Copies Set the default number of copies from 1 to 999 Use the procedure below to specify the default number of copies 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer and Change of Copies 3 Press or the numeric keys to set the default number of copies 4 Press OK 8 36 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Orientation Set the default orientation Portrait or Landscape Portrait Landscape Printer Printer Use the procedure below to set the default orientation for printing 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer and Change of Orientation 3 Press Portrait or Landscape 4 Press OK Form Feed Timeout Receiving print data from the computer the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed When the preset timeout passes the machine automatically prints paper The options are between 5 an
205. er as the reference point 2 30 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use Original size indicator plates Inch models Letter Lettera Legala Ledger P Letter Statement Oficiona 11x158 8 11 il 14 sl 17 Metric models Abo B6 A50 Folio A50 B50 A40 Bsa OficioN JB4qf11x150 CUBS A4 3 Close the original cover IMPORTANT Do not push the original cover forcefully when you close it Excessive pressure may crack the platen glass NOTE Shadows may be produced around the edges and in the middle of open faced originals CAUTION Do not leave the document processor open A as there is a danger of personal injury OPERATION GUIDE 2 31 Preparation before Use Loading Originals in the Document Processor The optional document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals Both sides of two sided originals are scanned Part Names of the Document Processor 1 Original placement indicator 2 Top cover 3 Original width guides 4 Original table 5 Original eject table 6 Original stopper 7 Opening handle Originals Supported by the Document Processor The document processor supports the following types of originals Weight 45 to 160 g m duplex 50 to 120 g m Size Maximum A3 to Minimum A5 Maximum Ledge
206. er must be uncurled before use Straighten the top edge if it is curled When loading paper into the multi purpose tray check that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper If there is just a small amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and you want to add more first remove the left over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray OPERATION GUIDE 2 23 Preparation before Use Loading Envelopes Up to 20 envelopes may be loaded in the multi purpose tray Acceptable envelope sizes are as follows Acceptable Envelope Size Youkei 2 162x114 mm Youkei 4 235x105 mm Monarch 3 7 8 x7 1 2 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 4 1 8 x9 1 2 Envelope DL 110x220 mm Envelope C5 1 162x229 mm Open the multi purpose tray 2 Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the envelope For landscape form envelopes close the flap Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides keeping the printing side face up and the edge with the flap facing towards you For portrait form envelopes close the flap Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides keeping the printing side face up and the edge with the flap facing the insertion slot 2 24 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use When you load envelopes or cardstock in the
207. er of pages n in the format 1 n can be changed manually Press Denominator and select Manual Press or to enter the total number of pages and press OK You can also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing Keys 10 Press Original Orientation to choose orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Press OK 11 Press OK 12 Press the Start key to start copying 4 24 OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Memo Mode Delivers copies with a space for adding notes You can also copy two originals onto the same sheet with a space or add lines to indicate page boundaries NOTE Memo mode is available for the copy paper sizes of Ledger Legal Oficio II 8 5x13 5 Letter Letter R Statement R A3 B4 Folio A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R 8K 16K and 16K R Layout A Reduces images of each original page for printing onto half of a page leaving the other half blank for notes Original Layout B Reduces images of two original pages for copying onto half of a single page leaving the other half blank for notes Ol ke ee Original OPERATION GUIDE 4 25 Copying Functions Types of Page Boundary Lines The following boundary lines are available ll w lt w Borders Cropmark Use the procedure below to insert page boundary lines on you
208. er provides color profiles to adjust color NOTE The color profile data import method varies for every TWAIN WIA compliant software Use the color profile after carefully reading the manual included with your TWAIN WIA complaint software Selecting a color profile compatible with this device 1 Select the color profile found in the CD included with this scanner CD Product Library under the Color Profile folder NOTE Use the indicated color profiles when you chose RGB in color type 5 32 OPERATION GUIDE 6 Document Box This chapter explains the typical procedure for utilizing Document Box USMO et Stn BOK suri Usmo St BOK sn 6 12 e Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory 6 20 e Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB eee 6 22 OPERATION GUIDE 6 1 Document Box Using a Custom Box NOTE In the following explanation it is assumed that user login administration is enabled For details on User Logon privileges refer to User Privileges on page 3 40 Creating a New Custom Box Use the procedure below to create a new box in the user box 1 Press the Document Box key lias Custom Box 2 Press Custom Box and then Register Edit Box foe a tone amen ld A 0001 s SALES Anonymous SS Search Name Search No 1 1 Register Edit Box Vv Store File Detail Pa 08 08 2009 10 10 Press Add 4 Press Change for each item e
209. erall paper weight Top sheet thickness 0 086 to 0 107 mm Overall paper thickness 0 115 to 0 145 mm Moisture content 4 to 6 composite Colored Paper Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 2 of the Appendix In addition the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing up to 200 C or 392 F Preprinted Paper Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 2 of the Appendix The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing It must be resistant to silicone oil as well Do not use paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars Recycled Paper Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 2 of the Appendix however its whiteness may be considered separately NOTE Before purchasing recycled paper in volume try testing a sample to ensure that the print quality Appendix 20 OPERATION GUIDE Specifications NOTE Specifications are subject to change without notice Machine Type Description 42 ppm model 52 ppm model Desktop Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser tandem drum system Supported Original Types Sheet Book 3 dimensional objects maximum original size 11 x 17 A3 Original Feed System Fixed Paper Cassette 1 2 60 to 105 g m Weight Multi Purpose Tray 45 to 200 g
210. ere is a danger of fire or electrical shock Always grasp the power plug when removing the power cord from the outlet Always remove the power plug from the outlet when moving the machine If the power cord is damaged there is a danger of fire or electrical shock Always hold the designated parts only when lifting or moving the machine If this machine will be left unused for an extended period e g overnight turn it off at the main power switch If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time e g vacation remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution If the optional Fax kit is installed note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception For safety purposes always remove the power plug from the outlet when performing cleaning operations If dust accumulates within the machine there is a danger of fire or other trouble It is therefore recommended that you consult with your service representative in regard to cleaning of internal parts This is particularly effective if accomplished prior to seasons of high humidity Consult with your service representative in regard to the cost of cleaning the internal parts of the machine Aa AGA O Other precautions Do not place heavy objects on the machine or cause other damage to the machine Do not open the front cover turn off the main power switch or pull out the power plug during copying When lifting
211. ered Refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key on page 8 55 for more information on adding One Touch keys Choosing by Speed Dial a Ready to send Destination Access the destination by specifying the 4 digit 0001 to HEC 3 1000 One Touch Key number speed dial Destination I Detail Address abcd efg com To A g Book aika m EM In the basic screen for sending press the Quick No 10 200 188 120 Auto n fla el i Sari eigen Search key or No and use the numeric keys to enter na 2 emo the One Touch key number in the numeric entry g FAX Mo screen Enty 0001 0002 0003 0004 e D ae Entry On Hook J Direct J Chain Detail Eait e J Recall anne E ac ogos gt mo g WSD Scan NOTE if you entered the speed dial in 1 to 3 digit Lod press OK Destination Quick Setup original sending RES E UN ow 10 10 Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending You can specify destinations that combine e mail addresses folders SMB or FTP and fax numbers optional This is referred to as Multi Sending This is useful for sending to different types of destination e mail addresses folders etc in a single operation No of broadcast items E mail Up to 100 Folders SMP FTP Total of 10 SMB and FTP FAX Up to 500 i FAX Up to 100 Also depending on the settings you can send and print at the same time Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destin
212. escription Compression Ratio Priority Compression Ratio is given priority with smaller file size Standard Standard quality Quality Priority Image quality is given priority with larger file size Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for highly compressed PDF files 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v and Next of Function Defaults Press v twice and Change of High Comp PDF Image 3 Select the default for Compression Ratio Priority Standard or Quality Priority 4 Press OK 8 Color TIFF Compression Settings Select the compression method for TIFF images handled on this machine Use the procedure below to set the default Color TIFF Compression setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v and Next of Function Defaults Press twice and then Change of Color TIFF Compression 3 Select TIFF V6 or TTN2 4 Press OK Repeat Copying Select the Repeat Copy default The options are as follows The table below shows the available settings O me ee No Repeat Copy is performed Repeat Copy is performed NOTE This setting is not displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is installed or the Repeat Copy job is set to 0 Refer to page 4 36 for Repeat Copy OPERATION GUIDE 8 23 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to set the default Repeat Copy setting 1 2 3 4 Pres
213. ess Advanced Setup and then Centering Press On Centering is performed Press OK Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending OPERATION GUIDE Sending Functions Mixed Sized Originals Using the optional document processor the originals of different sizes can be placed in a batch and sent In this operation up to 30 originals of different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time Originals of the Same Width When the original widths are the same the combinations of originals that can be placed are as follows e Ledger and Letter A3 and A4 e Legal and Letter R Folio and A4 R Legal Letter R Letter R Folio A4R A4R p B4 and B5 He Y i alll on OPERATION GUIDE 5 7 Sending Functions When the original widths are different The combinations of originals of different sizes that can be placed together are as follows NOTE When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination Folio A4 R and B5 R make sure to set the System Menu key gt Common Settings gt Original Paper Settings gt Original Auto Detect to On for Folio For more information refer to Automatic Detection of Originals Available for metric models only on page 8 9 A3 B4 A4 B5
214. etect originals of special or non standard size The table below lists the special or non standard original sizes Item Description A6 Hagaki As A6 and Hagaki are similar in size select either one of them for automatic detection Folio Select Folio for automatic detection 11x15 Select the 11x15 size for automatic detection Use the procedure below to set automatic detection of originals 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings and then Change of Original Auto Detect 3 Select A6 or Hagaki of A6 Hagaki Select Off to disable automatic detection or On to enable automatic detection of Folio and 11x15 respectively 4 Press OK Media for Auto Selection Select a default media type for auto paper selection when Auto is selected of Paper Selection If Plain is selected the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected Select All Media Types for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size OPERATION GUIDE 8 9 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type used by Auto Selection 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings and then Change of Media for Auto B amp W 3 Select All Media Types or any media type for paper selection 4 Press OK Paper Source for Cover Paper Select paper
215. ets 80 g m with built in finisher 150 sheets 80 g m with optional job separator 250 sheets 80 g m Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography Main Memory Standard 2048 MB Maximum 2048 MB Hard Disk 160 GB Interface Standard USB Interface Connector 1 USB Hi Speed USB memory slot 2 Full Speed USB Network interface 1 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX Option KUIO W slot 2 Resolution 600 x 600 dpi Operating Environment Temperature 10 to 32 5 C 50 to 90 5 F Humidity 15 to 80 Altitude Brightness 2 500 m 8 202 ft maximum 1 500 lux maximum Dimension W x D x H 23 9 16 x 25 7 16 x 29 5 16 Main unit only 599 x 646 x 745 mm Weight without toner container and waste toner box Space Required W x D 187 b 85 kg 29 5 8 x 25 7 16 Using multi purpose tray 753 x 646 mm Power Source 120 V AC 60 Hz 12 A 220 to 240 V AC 50 Hz 6 3 A Options Document processor Paper feeder 3 000 sheet paper feeder Document finisher 3 000 sheet document finisher Job separator Built in finisher Key counter FAX kit Expansion memory Data Security Kit Printed Document Guard Kit Appendix 22 OPERATION GUIDE Printer Item Description Printing Speed First Print Time A4 feed from Cassette Same as Copying Speed
216. ey to start copying OPERATION GUIDE 4 29 Copying Functions Sharpness Adjust Adjust the sharpness of image outlines When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward Sharpen When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos in which moire patterns appear edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward Unsharpen Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots Follow the steps below to adjust sharpness Ready to copy Copies Place original Unsharpen 08 08 2009 10 10 Press Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Image Quality and then Press Sharpness Press 3 to 3 Unsharpen Sharpen to adjust the sharpness Press OK 6 Press the Start key Copying begins 4 30 OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Continuous Scan When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then copied as one job With this function originals are scanned until you press Scan Finish Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning e Original size selection e Zoom e Original orientation Border erase e Image quality selection e Density e Type of original 2 sided book original e Color Selection If you use
217. fChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of International Type face Corporation e UFST MicroType fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc are installed in this machine e This machine contains the NF module developed by ACCESS Co Ltd e This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group This product contains NetFront Browser of ACCESS CO LTD e ACCESS ACCESS logo and NetFront are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS CO LTD in the United States Japan and other countries e 2009 ACCESS CO LTD All rights reserved e This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group ACG ESS NetFront Browser All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies The designations and will not be used in this Operation Guide OPERATION GUIDE xxi GPL Firmware of this machine is using in part the GPL applied codes www fsf org copyleft gpl html Open SSL License Copyright c 1998 2006 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of condition
218. ffer depending on the application Starting Application Use Ga Use the procedure below to start using an application 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System and then Next of Optional Function NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Select the desired application and press Activate You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail 4 Inthe license key entry screen press Official Some applications do not require you to enter a license key If the license key entry screen does not appear go to Step 5 To use the application as a trial press Trial without entering the license key 5 When the confirmation screen appears press Yes IMPORTANT If you change the date time while using an application you will no longer be able to use the application OPERATION GUIDE 8 75 Default Setting System Menu Checking Application Details Use the procedure below to check the details of an application 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System and then Next of Optional Function NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and
219. for printing from the copy or Document Box screen printing from the PC and printing of the received fax data There is a paper indicator in the front of the machine that shows whether there is paper in the Job Separator CAUTION Note that some paper types have a tendency to curl and may jam in the paper eject unit If the ejected paper slips or stacks unevenly turn the paper in the cassette over and try again NOTE To ensure that paper is delivered to the Job Separator select the output destination or change the default setting For details refer to the Paper Output on page 8 14 e When removing paper from the Job Separator pull it out at an angle Use the key counter to monitor machine usage The key counter offers a convenient solution for centralized management of copy volume for different departments in a large company Insert the key counter securely into the key counter slot NOTE When the key counter function is activated copies can only be made when a key counter is inserted If the key counter is not inserted Insert key counter will be displayed Appendix 8 OPERATION GUIDE FAX Kit By installing the FAX kit fax send receive is enabled Also it is possible to use it as a network fax by using it with a computer When two FAX kits are installed the units can be connected to two different telephone lines which will enable quicker message transmission to a number of recipients
220. g JOD FISIONY ecc h etna a ced ae seen ad ee aon Aaah eee een en Deas 7 9 Sending the Job Log History 0 00 tte 7 11 Pause and Resumption of Jobs 0 0000 eee eee 7 13 Canceling ot JobSi 2 s tak ene eset poked beet yeaa E eis ee 7 13 Priority Override for Waiting JobDS 20 0 0 eee ae 7 14 Reordering Print JODS 22 i 20c nt teidwatdoe eda eeeba ee ede bed eae bee eA ee eS 7 14 Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper 0 0 cee eee eee 7 15 Device Communication 0 0 0c e eet 7 16 8 Default Setting System Menu Common SeuingS o 4 25 nar ehinaiinde by ae YPra he eS eas aie EEA RATATE NSRS 8 2 Copy SCUINGS 23 exe ke tite dt seen aoa ee ee een eta yeaa eel aes eed a ee 8 26 Sending SeUINGS 2 ss ke oa pete eee hel Peas PRA awa eee ae Cea E AREARE RETARA ARA 8 29 Document Box SettingS cc 0c be seb eee piae bee ed eee ee eee eee 8 32 Primer Settings secs arer ea ditear EEEE AEE eager Gee Ae etd 8 34 Printing Reports Sending Notice 6 cette 8 39 Adjustment Maintenance 0 0 00 eee eee 8 42 DateNIMe r oii cceb ried enranhoredene there ciate cginieidarheee ethos onde nebeed ad 8 47 Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys 000e eee eae 8 51 Internet Browser Setup 000 cect eee teens 8 58 Applications re msaa chase ea wake Skis ba Rae Ra aly Read RA Sa ee be eee 8 60 System Initialization 0c ce be ee eee eea a i ened eee eee be eee
221. g on the application being installed the installation may take some time Once the installation ends the original screen reappears 7 To install another application repeat steps 5 to 6 8 To remove the USB memory press Remove Memory and wait until the Removable Memory can be safely removed message appears Then remove the USB memory Activating Deactivating Application To use an application set the application to Activate Use the procedure below to start using an application 1 Press the System Menu key 8 60 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu 2 Press w and then Application NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Select the desired application and press Activate You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail NOTE To exit an application press Deactivate 4 Enter the license key and press Official Some applications do not require you to enter a license key If the license key entry screen does not appear go to Step 5 To use the application as a trial press Trial without entering the license key 5 When the confirmation screen appears press Yes IMPORTANT If you change the d
222. g the URL for Search Internet Use the selected search site to search that page with the entered keyword Retrieval in page Search from the entered keyword in the currently displayed page You can continue your search by pressing SearchUp or SearchDown Home page Displays your specified home page You can set your home page in the Browser Preferences on page 8 58 Reload Updates the page Back Forward Displays the previous page or the next page NOTE Pressing the Reset key while the Internet browser is displayed will exit the browser and return you to the application list screen without displaying the browser exit 3 50 OPERATION GUIDE 4 Copying Functions This chapter explains the functions available for copying e Gna Bee na a E Paper Se Ctl cina 4 4 Mired Sized ONgiINalS sisinsiieansadninie a er Gall Orena Nesnsnaannnnnnaen nn a Quiput DS SAO scssavinitiiaiaididaiennannnnaannmanae Le Comon Modo icclacitioitper brain diate mnaiadasme a Arey COSMIC Mode cinentacstsinxtcmtintaiisintinecsaiasmimmemanee ee ae cg icenscectscrercrseneiesseessmesverseenineseentanaenteemienee e Bo kletfr m ISOS ics rnense aa A le Cover KOJE cecidi einai 4 21 ROA OYSTIAN sorana ia T ee Page NuMDENN Orern ean A s Momo MoE iene e Image Repeat Double Copy ccsssssscccecessssssssececssssssseeenens 4 27 ECOPIN E imsninena Snapes S ANUS orenera EEE EErEE terete 4 30 TiS Sedins aiina
223. gement Managing Accounts This changes the registered account information or deletes the account Use the procedure below to manage accounts 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting and then Register Edit of Accounting List 5 Select an account to change or delete User Login Job Accounting Accounting List i Register an account that is permitted to use this machine Maximum 1000 Sort Name z NOTE Select Name or ID from the Sort pull down 01 Account 00001000 menu to sort the account names hla 2i Press Search Name or Search ID to search by account name or account ID 03 Account 00003000 04 Account 00004000 05 Account 00005000 The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited 08 08 2009 10 10 Changing account information 1 Press Detail 2 Refer to steps 5 to 7 of Adding an Account and Account xx Account Name cane steps 2 to 5 of Restricting Using the Machine to change account information __ 0001000 aa 3 Press Register al am Pua C 4 Press Yes in the registration confirm
224. gin 08 08 2009 10 10 NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 for details on entering characters Check Counter 3 Press Login Password Press keys to enter the login data using the numeric keys OPERATION GUIDE 11 3 Management Logout 4 Enter the login password and press OK NOTE If Job Accounting is enabled you can browse the number of pages printed and the number of pages scanned by pressing Check Counter If Network Authentication is selected as the user authentication method either Local or Network can be selected as the authentication destination 5 Check the login user name and password are correct and press Login To log out the machine press the Logout key to return to the login user name login password entry screen Auto Logout Logout is automatically executed in the following cases When the Power key is pressed to enter the sleep mode e When auto sleep is activated e When auto panel reset is activated 11 4 OPERATION GUIDE Management Adding a User This adds a new user You can add Up to 1 000 users including the default login user name The table below explains the user information to be registered Description User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list up to 32 characters Login User Name Enter the login user name to login up to 64 characters The same login user name cannot be registered L
225. h Login to search by name or login user name The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited Changing user information 1 Press Detail 2 Refer to steps 6 to 17 of Adding a User to User Name Gass change a user property T 3 Press Register Login User Name Change Login Password Change 0099 aa z p Access Level Change Account Name Change User 2 02Account 2 gt 01 User Press Yes in the registration confirmation screen The user information is changed E mail Address IC Card Information Change abed efy com 25 Empty Cancel l Register J 08 08 2009 10 10 OPERATION GUIDE 11 7 Management Deleting a user 1 Press Delete 2 Press Yes on the screen to confirm deletion The selected user will be deleted NOTE The default user with administrator rights cannot be deleted For a user without administrator rights who logs in These users can partially change their own user properties including user name login password and E mail address Although login user name access level or account name cannot be changed the users can check the present status Use the procedure below to change user properties 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Property 3 Refer to steps 6 to 17 of Adding a User to change user properties User Name Change 01 User S ante ae were Tas Press Detail of Login User Name or Account oo i m ad 1 Name to check th
226. he System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of Scan Resolution 3 Select the default resolution 4 Press OK Color Selection Send Store Select the default color mode for scanning documents The available default settings are shown below Color mode Description Auto Color Color Gray Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black and white and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Grayscale Auto Color Color B amp W Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black and white and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Black and White Full Color Scan document in full color Grayscale Scan document in grayscale for smoother and finer finish Black amp White Scan document in black and white File size is smaller than Full Color or Grayscale Use the procedure below to select the default color mode 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of Color Select Send Store 3 Select the default color mode 4 Press OK File Format Select the default file type to send the scanned originals The available default settings are shown below Item Description Send files in PDF format Send files in TIFF format Send files in JPEG format XPS Send files in XPS format High C
227. he default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning excludes copying FAX TX Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed Use the procedure below to specify the counter limits 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter a login user name and password and press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password OPERATION GUIDE 11 21 Management User Login Job Accounting Copy Restriction Total i Set the default limit value for restricting use of the functions for each account J by counter 1 9999999 9999999 Cancel el OK 08 08 2009 10 10 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting Next of Default Setting and then Next of Default Counter Limit Press Change for the item you want to modify and then press or or use the numeric keys to enter the default restriction on the number of sheets Press OK To set another default restriction repeat steps 5 to 6 11 22 OPERATION GUIDE Management Counting the Number of Pages Printed This counts the number of pages printed Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounti
228. he folder where the file will be stored and press Open The machine will display the top 3 folder levels including the root folder fF Removable Memory 4 Press Store File E Removable Memory f 4 4 Date and Time A 1 Document 10 10 2008 09 30 2 Document 10 10 2008 09 40 D 3 Document 10 10 2008 09 50 Memory 5 4 Document 10 10 2008 10 00 Information B 5 Document 10 10 2008 10 05 Remove Memory Delete Detail Open Store File Removable Memory j 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Set the type of original file format etc as desired 6 Press the Start key The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB memory 6 22 OPERATION GUIDE 7 Status Job Cancel This chapter explains how to check the status and history of jobs and cancel the jobs being processed or waiting to be printed This chapter also explains how to check the remaining amount of toner and paper and the status of devices and how to cancel the fax communication TCI JOD SIIS srra Checking Jop PISO msnen oe EEA RA e Sending the Job Log RSE see cca soca sacs ctnosonronoeoemrermresesnsnsnctacaess 7 11 e Pause and Resumption of JODS wes cccccccsececdscesacstesscsvecaadeneteostosensuatis 7 13 t 51 Ol JoGS ne eee ne aS 7 13 Priority Override for Waiting JODS face cciectesctacat ce aececrtescteadtecetasteeass 7 14 Reordering Print JODS acces See seisiss ernest en psi osiorestrtiewienentinemaactanden 7 14 e Ch
229. her storage is available The job is canceled Press End Try to perform the job again after printing or deleting data from the FAX box Reference Page Finisher tray is full of paper Is the acceptable storage capacity exceeded for the document finisher tray Remove paper from the document finisher tray If printing can be restarted the touch panel display will prompt you to press Continue Then press Continue Hard Disk error Job is canceled Press End An error has occurred on the hard disk The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows 01 Initialization error Initialize the hard disk 04 Insufficient space on the hard disk to complete this operation Move or delete data stored on the hard disk to increase available space Incorrect account ID The Account ID does not match Check the registered Account ID Incorrect box password Enter the correct password Incorrect Login User Name or Password Enter correct login user name or password Job Accounting restriction exceeded Is the acceptable printing count restricted by Job Accounting exceeded The printing count exceeded the acceptable count restricted by Job Accounting Cannot print any more This job is canceled Press End Job separator is full of paper KPDL error Is the maximum capacity of the job separator exceeded Take some paper out of the job separator Printing
230. ht digits between 0 and 99999999 Restriction This Prohibits printing scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11 18 Use the procedure below to register a new account 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting Register Edit of Accounting List and then Add 5 Press Change of Account Name Account Name Change j 01 Account 2 6 Enter the account name and press OK The Account 1D aa Account screen reappears gt 00001000 Copy Restriction Total Change Print Restriction Total Change on Jon a NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 for details on entering characters Ale Wy Cancel l Register 08 08 2009 10 10 7 Follow steps 5 and 6 above to enter the Account ID NOTE Any account ID that has already registered cannot be used Enter any other account ID 8 Activate or deactivate restriction Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11 18 9 Press Register to add a new account on the Account List 11 16 OPERATION GUIDE Mana
231. idgabiaiogdetragidoetinbaeas vi Caution Warning Labels pesse ssress giani drr tad ene eee ix Installation Precautions osain oaa rieka ce be ek ed ea Sede dba ee ede ed be ed ee ee x Precautions Or Use cds tue bees See ee eae ech eae eed aed Mare ay RNAAR xii Laser Sally serri rea amaki clan ebae el eee eden ebebpedad acide bebe padded aoe paddy XV Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power 0 20 0e0s xvi Legal Restriction on Copying Scanning ssaa aaaea aaea xvii Legal and Safety Information 0 0 xix 1 Part Names Operation Panek aras seamy vena ee tae hehe Re eo a ee Re ve ee a eae a a 1 2 MacNN 3 20 25 bend eked wea ated daretn wine dd eee ache hae Seared eee Mewar added 1 4 2 Preparation before Use Check the Accessories oau e200 00004 e eben bebe eee da deeded pe bee ete dene 2 2 Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables 202200005 2 3 Connecting Cables seee itea ehakedtare chet a eee dad Sea edhe Pada lee Ae 2 5 Power OMOT ressa acca antes uae a pane aeee wane haa ee site REEERE 2 7 sleepand Auto Sleep occ cy es ee keda eee ae aya ha se eh de oe a ee ee 2 9 Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle 0 00 0 e eee eae 2 10 Switching the Language for Display Language 000 c cee eee 2 10 Setting Date and Time 0 0 eee 2 11 Network Setup LAN Cable Connection 000 0 e eee eee 2 12 Installing SOWIE ese Lac ew be eave chan ee da
232. ifferent sending options can be specified in combination Refer to Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending on page 3 32 OPERATION GUIDE 3 23 Basic Operation Send as E mail Sends a scanned original image as an E mail attachment NOTE You must have a network environment in which this machine can connect to a mail server It is recommended that the machine be used in an environment in which it can connect to the mail server at any time over a LAN Access the Embedded Web Server beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e mail For details see Embedded Web Server Settings for E mail on page 2 16 ee Ready to send Destination Place original E mail Address Entry E mail Address Add a new e mail destination i Press E mail Address then enter the address using the keyboard screen Add to Addr Book Next Dest Cancel lel OK 08 08 2009 10 10 1 Press the Send key Displays the screen for sending NOTE Depending on the settings the address book screen may appear In this event press Cancel to display the screen for sending 2 Press E mail Addr Entry and then E mail Address NOTE Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One Touch Keys Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 30 Enter destination E mail address and press OK Press Next Dest and repeat steps 3 to specify the destinat
233. inal NOTE To perform gray adjustment verify that either 11 x 8 1 2 or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette Use the procedure below for adjustment Press the System Menu key Press v Adjustment Maintenance v and then Next of Gray Adjustment Press Execute A color pattern is printed As shown in the illustration place the printed side down on the platen with the three black boxes aligned to the top Press Execute The color pattern is read and adjustment begins Press OK in the adjustment end confirmation screen 8 46 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Date Timer Date Timer settings include Date Time 8 47 e Date Format 8 47 Time Zone 8 48 e Auto Panel Reset 8 48 e Auto Sleep 8 49 Auto Error Clear 8 49 e Interrupt Clear Timer 8 50 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Date Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine If you perform Send as E mail the date and time set here will be displayed on the header Ga CAUTION Be sure to set Time Zone before the Date Time setup Use the procedure below to set the date and time 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Date Timer and then Change of Date Time 3 Press or to enter the date and time respectively 4 Press OK NOTE If
234. ing System Menu 4 To set your home page press Change of Home Page press URL enter the URL and then press OK Press OK again NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 lt blue gt for details on entering characters 5 To set the text size press Change of Text Size select Large Medium or Small as the text size and then press OK 6 To set the display mode press Change of Display Mode select Normal Just Fit Rendering or Smart Fit Rendering as the display mode and then press OK 7 To specify the settings for accepting cookies press Change of Cookie select Accept All Reject All or Prompt before Accepting as your cookie acceptance policy and then press OK Proxy Settings Use the procedure below to specify the proxy settings 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press v and then Internet NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user GE name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Press Change of Proxy and then press On To set a proxy server HTTP 1 Press Keyboard of Proxy Server HTTP enter the proxy address and press OK 2 Press Keys and enter the port number To set a proxy server HTTPS 1 Press Keyboard of Proxy Server HTTPS ente
235. ing is not available for the selected paper size or media type Ignore The setting is ignored and the job is printed Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed No Staple Error Select what to do when staples run out during printing a Ignore Printing continues without stapling Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed NOTE The messages are displayed when the optionalbuilt in finisher document finisher or 3 000 sheet document finisher is installed Stapling Limit Error Select what to do when stapling capacity is exceeded during printing a Ignore Printing continues without stapling Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed NOTE The messages are displayed when the optionalbuilt in finisher document finisher or 3 000 sheet document finisher is installed 8 12 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Punch Waste Full Error Select what to do when the punch waste box becomes full during printing Le ee Ignore Printing continues without punching Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed NOTE The messages are displayed when the optional 3 000 sheet document finisher and punch unit are installed Paper Mismatch Error Select what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer
236. ings are shown below O ee O ae Continuous scan not performed Continuous scan performed Refer to page 4 10 for Original Orientation Use the procedure below to select the default settings for continuous scanning 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of Continuous Scan 3 Select Off or On for the default Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals 4 Press OK Original Image Set the default original document type The available default settings are shown below Text Photo Text and photos together Photo For photos taken with a camera Text Only text no photos for OCR Image quality suitable for OCR software Printed Document For documents printed from this machine This function is only available for black and white mode Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of Original Image 3 Select the default original image 4 Press OK Scan Resolution Select the default scanning resolution The options are 600x600dpi 400x400dpi Ultra Fine 300x300dpi 200x400dpi Super Fine 200x200dpi Fine 200x100dpi Normal Use the procedure below to select the default resolution setting 8 16 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu 1 Press t
237. inked with the on screen OK OPERATION GUIDE 1 3 Part Names Machine 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 Original Cover Option 2 Original Size Indicator Plates 3 Clip Holder 4 Slit Glass 5 Attention Indicator Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped 6 Receive Indicator Blinks while data is received 7 Left Cover 1 8 Left Cover 1 Lever 9 Left Cover 2 10 Left cover 2 Handle 11 Platen 12 Operation Panel 13 Cassette 1 14 Cassette 2 1 4 OPERATION GUIDE Part Names I cone SS 15 Toner Container Stopper 16 Toner Container 17 Waste Toner Box 18 Paper Feed Unit A2 19 Paper Feed Unit Cover A3 20 Green Knob OPERATION GUIDE 1 5 Part Names 21 24 23 21 USB Memory Slot A1 22 Front Cover 23 Paper Width Adjusting Tab 24 Paper Length Guide 25 Top Tray 26 Main Power Switch 27 Paper Width Guide 28 Multi Purpose Tray 29 Option Interface Slot OPT2 30 USB Memory Slot A2 31 USB Interface Connector B1 32 Network Interface Connector 33 Option Interface Slot OPT1 OPERATION GUIDE 1 6 2 Preparation before Use This chapter explains the preparations before using this equipment for the first time as well as the procedures for loading paper and originals Check the ACCESS ON SS sini cucisi
238. interface you use Available Standard Interfaces Function Interface Necessary Cable Printer Scanner Network interface LAN 10Base T or Network FAX 100Base TX Shielded Printer USB interface USB2 0 compatible cable Hi Speed USB compliant Max 5 0 m Shielded Function available when using optional fax kit For details on Network FAX refer to the Fax Kit Operation Guide OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use Connecting Cables Connecting LAN Cable Optional Follow the steps below to connect a LAN cable to the machine 1 When the machine is powered up first press the Power key on the operation panel Check that the Power indicator and the memory indicator are off After this turn off the main power switch Check that the indicators are off 2 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface located on right side of the body Connect the other end of the cable to the hub 4 Configure the network For details refer to Network Setup LAN Cable Connection on page 2 12 OPERATION GUIDE 2 5 Preparation before Use Connecting USB Cable Follow the steps below to connect a USB cable to the machine 1 When the machine is powered up first press the Power key on the operation panel Check that the Power indicator and the memory indicator are off After this turn off the main power switch Check that the indicators are off
239. ion Up to 100 E mail addresses can be specified NOTE When Add to Addr Book is displayed the destinations are registered in the Address Book 5 Press OK The destinations are registered in the destination list 3 24 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation a Ready to send oo 6 Check the destination list Place original p ores Select a destination and press Detail Edit to check ABCD abcd efg com Book ane Ena and edit it TUVW 10 200 188 120 addr Eney siek a Select a destination and press Delete to remove On Hool it Chain Detail Edit Delete Recall A Corres Jora ee r C a FAX No the destination from the list Entry 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 No AAA BBB ccc DDD EEE Te n 3 M ft 5i _ ait _ oe ff wate WSD Sean NOTE When selecting On for Entry Check for New i Destination page 8 31 the confirmation screen ee eth Al appears Enter the same destination again and press OK When selecting On for Destination Check before Send page 8 30 the confirmation screen appears after pressing the Start key For details refer to Confirmation Screen of Destinations on page 3 29 Send to Folder SMB Send to Folder FTP Stores a scanned original image file in the specified shared folder of any PC Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server NOTE e Refer to Help of your operating system for details on how to share a folder e Be sur
240. ion of Histories on page 7 10 7 6 OPERATION GUIDE Status Job Cancel Checking the Detailed Information of Jobs Check the detailed information of each job Use the procedure below to check a job s information 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 Press Printing Jobs Sending Jobs or Storing Jobs To check the scheduled transmission press Sending Jobs and then Scheduled Job 3 Select the job whose details you wish to check from the list and press Detail scepeea Time Tyre TI E Detailed information of the selected job is BB abc def com InProcess displayed AS Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device Paper Supplies eae Status 08 08 2009 10 10 Use IV Jor A to see the next or previous page of Job No Status Destination information 000080 Processing Job Type Destination Sending Job E mail ABCDE User Name User1 Job Name doc20070404115151 Accepted Time 10 10 10 A 1 2 Vv a Close Status 08 08 2009 10 10 In Sending Jobs you can check the destination by Job No Status Destination pressing Detail in Status Destination 000080 Processing ias Job Type Destination Sending Job E mail ABCDE User Name User1 Job Name doc20070404115151 Accepted Time 10 10 10 n M a Close 08 08 2009 10 10 OPERATION GUIDE 7 7 Status Job Cancel Status Destination is displ
241. ions are as follows Original Copy Orientation of Original Platen Document processor lt NOTE The inch model provides two hole and three hole punching The metric model provides two hole and four hole punching Y lt Follow the steps as below for punching 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Org Paper Finishing and then press Staple Punch OPERATION GUIDE 3 19 Basic Operation Ready to copy Staple Punch Place original Original i Zoom 100 Paper nE Add Shortcut op Edge Top Original Orientation 08 08 2009 10 10 Select the type of hole punching Press Original Orientation to choose orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Then press OK Press OK Press the Start key If the original is placed on the platen Place the next original and press the Start key Copying begins If all original pages have been scanned press Finish Scan Copying begins 3 20 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Printing Printing from Applications Follow the steps below to prin
242. ions are displayed on the screen to select original size The dimensions available are as follows The table below lists the sizes that can be registered Input units Dimensions Inch models X 2 to 17 in 0 01 increments Y 2 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models X 50 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Y 50 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments Up to four custom original sizes can be added Use the procedure below to set a custom original size Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings and then Next of Custom Original Size Press Change of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4 on which you wish to register the size Press On and then press or numeric keys to enter X horizontal and Y vertical dimensions Press OK ao oa fF WO N Move to the copy send or document box screen and press the Reset key Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print Set up a maximum of four frequently used custom paper sizes The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select paper set in the multi purpose tray The table below lists the sizes that can be registered Input units Dimensions Inch models H 5 83 to 17 in 0 01 increments V 3 86 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models H 148 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments V 98 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments 8 4 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Up to four custom
243. is turned on Checkpoints Is the machine plugged in Corrective Actions Plug the power cord into an AC outlet Reference Page Pressing the Start key does not produce copies Is there a message on the touch panel Determine appropriate response to the message and respond accordingly Is the machine in Sleep mode Press the Power key to recover the machine from Sleep mode The machine will be ready to copy within 15 seconds Blank sheets are ejected Are the originals loaded correctly When placing originals on the platen place them face down and align them with the original size indicator plates When placing originals in the optional document processor place them face up Printouts are too light Is the machine in Auto Density mode Set the correct density level for auto density Is the machine in Manual Density mode Use Image Quality to set the correct density level When changing the default density level adjust the density manually and choose the desired level Is the toner distributed evenly within the toner container Shake the toner container from side to side about several times Is there a message indicating the addition of toner Replace the toner container Is the paper damp Replace the paper with new paper Is the drum dirty Carry out Drum Refresh Is EcoPrint mode enabled Disable EcoPrint mode
244. ith administrator rights Press the System Menu key Press User Login Job Accounting kh OO N If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login OPERATION GUIDE 11 5 Management user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 5 Press Next of User Login Setting Register Edit of Local User List and then Add Press Change of User Name User Name OL User gt 7 Enter the user name and press OK Login User Name Login Password 0099 2 Access Level Account Name NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on user gt Shore Appendix 10 for details on entering characters E mail Address IC Card Information abcd efg com 2 Empty 8 Enter the login user name and E mail address following 6 and 7 above 08 08 2009 10 10 Cancel l Register J 9 Press Change of Login Password and then Password 10 Enter the login password and press OK 11 Press Confirm Password 12 Enter the same login password to confirm and press OK 13 Press OK 14 Press Change of Access Level 15 Select the user access privilege and press OK 16 Press Change of Account Name 17 Select the account and press OK User Account Name i Select account to which this user will be attached
245. job boxes are automatically deleted For details refer to Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents on page 6 17 Private Print Stored Job Box page 6 12 In Private Printing you can specify that a job is not printed until you release the job at the operation panel When sending the job from the application software specify a 4 digit access code in the printer driver The job is released for printing by entering the access code on the operation panel ensuring confidentiality of the print job The data will be deleted upon completion of print job or after the main power switch is turned off In Hold Job access codes are not mandatory but can be set on the printer driver if printing with PIN security is required In this event you need to enter the access code to print the stored jobs Print data will be stored in the hard disk after printing This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly Quick Copy Proof and Hold Box page 6 13 Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed Activating Quick Copy and printing a document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box OPERATION GUIDE 3 33 Basic Operation When additional copies are required you can reprint the required number of copies from the operation panel By default up to 32 documents can be stored When power is turned off all stored jobs will be deleted NOTE When
246. k before send 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Send and then Change of Entry Check for New Dest 3 Select Off or On 4 Press OK Setting the Default Send Screen Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you press the Send key The table below shows the available settings Destination Displays the destination screen when the Send key is pressed screen for sending Address Book Displays the address book when the Send key is pressed Use the procedure below to set the default send screen 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Send and then Change of Default Screen 3 Press Destination or Address Book 4 Press OK OPERATION GUIDE 8 31 Default Setting System Menu Document Box Settings The following settings are available for Document Box e Registering Editing Box 8 32 e Default Setting 8 32 e Job Box 8 32 e Quick Setup Registration 8 32 Registering Editing Box Creates a new box edits a box or checks details of a box in the custom box or deletes a box from the custom box For details refer to Using a Custom Box on page 6 2 Default Setting Sets the time at which documents in the custom box are automatically deleted For details refer to Setting the document deletion time on page 6 3 Job Box The following three operations can be done For details refer to each page shown below e Quick Copy Proof and Hold Print Box page 6 13
247. k original Toy ice Stitch Book gt gt Booklet Di Binding Top Edge Top i Right p Original JS i Top 08 08 2009 10 10 2 sided Finishing gt gt Booklet f Y j Binding 5 Ifyou selected 2 sided gt gt Booklet or Book gt gt Booklet choose the binding orientation in Finishing If you selected 1 sided gt gt Booklet choose the binding orientation in Finishing 6 Ifyou choose 1 sided gt gt Booklet 2 sided gt gt Booklet or Book gt gt Booklet you can add the cover Press Cover select Cover and press OK 7 Press Original Orientation to choose orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Then press OK 8 Ifthe optional 3 000 sheet document finisher and folding unit are installed the Saddle Stitch option is displayed To use saddle stitching press Saddle Stitch and then press Bind and Fold You can saddle stitch up to 16 sheets 64 pages 9 Press OK 10 Platen and press the Start key Copying begins NOTE When using the platen be sure to place the originals in page order If the originals are placed on the platen consecutively replace each original after pressing the Start key After scanning all originals press Finish Scan to start copying 4 20 OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Cover Mode Add a cover to the finished copies You can copy the first page and or the last page onto colored paper or
248. key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults v and then Change of Auto Image Rotation OPERATION GUIDE 8 21 Default Setting System Menu 3 Select the default for Off or On 4 Press OK EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default The table below shows the available settings i a eee No EcoPrint performed EcoPrint performed NOTE Refer to page 4 13 for EcoPrint Use the procedure below to set the default EcoPrint setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults v twice and then Change of EcoPrint 3 Select Off or On for the default 4 Press OK PDF TIFF JPEG Image Select the default PDF TIFF JPEG file quality Five options are available from 1 Low Quality High Comp to 5 High Quality Low Comp NOTE Higher quality will make the stored files larger Refer to page 5 12 for file formats Use the procedure below to select the default file quality setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v and Next of Function Defaults Press v twice and then Change of PDF TIFF JPEG Image Select the default image quality from 1 Low Quality to 5 High Quality 4 Press OK 8 22 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu High Comp PDF Image Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files The table below shows the available settings Item D
249. l or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Olivetti is prohibited XX OPERATION GUIDE Regarding Trade Names e PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation e KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation e Microsoft MS DOS Windows Windows NT and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S A and or other countries e Windows Me Windows XP and Windows Vista are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation e PCL is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company e Adobe Acrobat Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated e Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation e Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell Inc IBM and IBM PC AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation e Power PC is a trademark of IBM in the U S A and or other countries e AppleTalk is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc e This machine has been developed using embedded real time operating system Tornado by Wind River Systems Inc e TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc e TypeBankG B TypeBankM M and Typebank OCR are trademarks of TypeBank All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging Inc e Helvetica Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype Hell AG e ITC Avant Garde Gothic ITC Bookman ITC Zap
250. l receiving the next data This is the auto form feed timeout When the preset timeout passes the machine automatically put paper out However no output is performed if the last page has no data to be printed Auto IP Auto IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup However DHCP requires a DHCP server Auto IP is a server less method of choosing an IP address IP addresses between 169 254 0 0 to 169 254 255 255 are reserved for Auto IP and assinged automatically Auto Paper Selection A function to automatically select paper in the same size as original at printing Auto Sleep A mode designed for electrical power saving activated when the machine is left unused or data transfer for a specific period In Sleep mode power consumption is kept to a minimum Bonjour Bonjour also known as zero configuration networking is a service that automatically detects computers devices and services on an IP network Bonjour because an industry standard IP protocol is used allows devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353 If a firewall is enabled the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets If Bonjour does not run stably check the firewall settings and ensure that
251. le Format 8 17 8 18 File Name 8 19 High Comp PDF Image 8 23 JPEG TIFF Print 8 24 Margin 8 21 Original Image 8 16 Original Orientation 8 15 PDF TIFF JPEG Image 8 22 Repeat Copying 8 23 Scan Resolution 8 16 XPS Fit to Page 8 25 Zoom 8 19 Default Gateway Appendix 27 Default Screen 8 2 Density Adjustment Copy 3 7 Send 5 17 Destination 8 51 Adding 8 51 Adding a contact 8 51 Adding a Group 8 53 Choosing by One Touch Key 3 32 Choosing by Speed Dial 3 32 Choosing from the Address Book 3 30 Editing 8 54 One Touch Key 8 55 Quick No Search key 3 3 Search 3 31 Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending 3 32 Device 7 16 Index 2 OPERATION GUIDE Index Canceling FAX Communication 7 18 Error Handling 8 12 Checking Status 7 16 Error Messages 10 6 Configuring 7 17 Expansion Memory Appendix 9 Displaying Screen 7 16 F USB Memory 7 17 File DHCP Appendix 28 Format 5 12 DHCP IPv6 Appendix 28 PDF 5 14 Document Box 3 33 6 1 File Name 4 35 Basic Operation 3 35 File Separation 5 13 Custom Box 3 33 6 2 Form Overlay 4 22 Document deletion time 6 3 Storing a Form 6 17 Form Overlay 6 7 FTP Appendix 28 Job Box 3 33 6 12 FTP Reception Quick Setup Registration 8 32 Protocol Detail 8 66 What is Document Box 3 33 FTP Encrypted TX 5 31 Document Finisher Appendix 4 Appendix G 25 Glass Platen Document Guard 8 73 Cleaning 9 2 Document Processor Appendix 4 Appen GPL xxii dix 24 Gray Adjustment 8 46 How to Load Origin
252. lected as the user authentication method either Local or Network can be selected as the authentication destination Logout To logout from the machine press the Logout key to return to the login user name password entry screen 3 2 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Enter key and Quick No Search key This section explains how to use the Enter key and Quick No Search key on the operation panel Using the Enter lt key The Enter key works in the same way as keys displayed on the touch panel such as OK and Close The Enter symbol is displayed next to the keys whose operations are carried out by the Enter key e g 4 OK 7 Close The operation of the Enter key is explained below using copy paper selection as an example For details of the procedure refer to Paper Selection on page 4 4 Ready to copy 1 Inthe paper selection screen press the key for the z cassette containing the required paper size Paper Selection The Enter symbol appears on the OK on the l to touch panel indicating that the Enter key performs Aui meae Letter th me action as OK e e same actio OK RET BT Pie e E a Ledger E3 MP Tray x Plain Setting 2 To copy using the selected paper press the Enter riginal p ER Letter en 3 100 Plain key or OK Ta 08708 2009 10 10 Use the Quick No Search keys to perform an action by simply entering a number directly using the numeric keys F
253. lick the icon shown on the task bar to display the Driver Software Installation screen When Your devices are ready to use is displayed on the Driver Software Installation screen the installation is completed Procedure Using this machine 1 Press the Send Key Displays the screen for sending NOTE Depending on the settings the address book screen may appear In this event press Cancel to display the screen for sending 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen Press WSD Scan Press From Operation Panel and press Next OPERATION GUIDE 5 27 Sending Functions eee 5 Select the destination computer and press OK ij Select the destination computer and press OK Press Reload to reload the computer list Computer Name Reload Eal You can view information on the selected computer z pc000102 by pressing Detail pc000103 ai pco00104 aa pcoo0105 Vv Cancel J 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Select the type of originals file format etc as necessary 7 Press the Start key Sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated Procedure Using WSD Scan from Your Computer 1 Press the Send Key The send screen appears NOTE Depending on the settings the address book screen may appear In this event press Cancel to display the screen for sending 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen Press WS
254. load paper according to the steps below Example copying on Letterhead Original Paper Finished ABC ABC Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray NOTE When loading cover paper in a cassette or multi purpose tray load the face on which printing is supposed to be done upward Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper types 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings v and then Change of Special Paper Action Select Adjust Print Direction or Speed Priority 4 Press OK Switching Unit of Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions Use the procedure below to change the input units 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings and then Change of Measurement 3 Select mm for metric or inch for inch 4 Press OK OPERATION GUIDE 8 11 Default Setting System Menu Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred The possible errors and what to do for the errors are as follows Duplexing Error Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type a 1 sided Printed in 1 sided Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed Finishing Error Select alternative actions when finishing stapling or offsett
255. lose control over IP address allocation dpi dots per inch A unit for resolution representing the number of dots printed per inch 25 4 mm EcoPrint Mode A printing mode that helps save toner Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal Emulation The function to interpret and execute other printers page description languages The machine emulates operation of PCL6 KPDL and KPDL automatic FTP File Transfer Protocol A protocol to transfer files on the TCP IP network whether the Internet or an intranet Along with HTTP and SMTP POP FTP is now frequently used on the Internet Grayscale A computer color expression Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray varying from black at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest without any other colors Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels that is white and black only for 1 bit 256 gray levels including white and black for 8 bits and 65 536 gray levels for 16 bits Help A Help key is provided on this machine s operation panel If you are unsure of how to operate the machine would like more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly press the Help key to view a detailed explanation on the touch panel IP Address An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network The format of an IP address is four sets of num
256. ls In case of an odd number of originals the back side of the last copy will be blank Original The following binding options are available A Original Left Right to Binding Left Right Images on the second sides are not rotated B Original Left Right to Binding Top Images on the Original second sides are rotated 180 Copies can be bound on the top edge facing the same orientation when turning the pages Two sided to One sided Copies each side of a two sided original onto two individual sheets The optional document processor is required The following binding options are available Binding Left Right Images on the second sides are not rotated e Binding Top Images on the second sides are rotated 180 Two sided to Two sided Produces two sided copies from two sided originals The optional document processor is required NOTE The paper sizes supported in Two sided to Two sided are Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Original Executive Statement R Oficio Il 8 5x13 5 A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R and Folio OPERATION GUIDE 3 11 Basic Operation Book to One sided Book to Two sided Facing pages Facing pages gt Two sided gt Facing pages ef
257. lth and the environment Offenders will be subjected to the penalties and measures laid down by the law TO DISPOSE OF OUR DEVICES CORRECTLY a Contact the Local Authorities who will give you the practical information you need and the instructions for handling the waste correctly for example location and times of the waste collection centres etc b When you purchase a new device of ours give a used device similar to the one purchased to our dealer for disposal The crossed dustbin symbol on the device means that when it to be disposed of the device is to be taken to the equipped waste collection centres and is to be handled separately from urban waste The producer guarantees the activation of the treatment collection recycling and disposal procedures in accordance with Directive 2002 96 CE and subsequent amendments 2 FOR OTHER COUNTRIES NOT IN THE EU The treatment collection recycling and disposal of electric and electronic devices will be carried out in accordance with the laws in force in the country in question
258. m Paper Type Cassette 1 2 Plain Rough Vellum Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Colour Prepunched Letterhead High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Duplex Same as Simplex Multi Purpose Tray Plain Transparency OHP film Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Hagaki Color Colour Prepunched Letterhead Thick Envelope High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Paper Size Cassette 1 2 Maximum 11 x 17 A3 Duplex 11 x 17 A3 Minimum 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A5R Duplex 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A5 R Multi Purpose Tray Maximum 11 x 17 A3 Minimum 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A6 R Zoom Level Manual mode 25 to 400 1 increments Auto mode Preset Zoom Printing Speed A4 Letter 42 sheets min A4 R Letter R 27 sheets min A3 Ledger 23 sheets min B4 Legal 23 sheets min B5 42 sheets min B5 R 22 sheets min A5 R A6 R 16 sheets min A4 Letter 52 sheets min A4 R Letter R 31 sheets min A3 Ledger 26 sheets min B4 Legal 26 sheets min B5 52 sheets min B5 R 24 sheets min A5 R A6 R 18 sheets min First Print Time A4 feed from Cassette 3 9 seconds or less Warm up Power on 30 seconds or less Time 22 C 71 6 F 60 Sleep 15 seconds or less OPERATION GUIDE Appendix 21 Paper Capacity Cassette Description 42 ppm model 52 ppm model 500 sheets 80 g m Multi Purpose Tray 200 sheets 80 g m Output Tray Capacity Top tray 250 she
259. m Overlay on page 4 22 and Form Overlay from Custom Boxes on page 6 7 Deleting a Form Stored You can delete the form stored in the Form for Form Overlay box Use the procedure below to delete a form 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Job Box 3 Select Form for Form Overlay and press Open 6 18 OPERATION GUIDE Document Box Form for Form Overlay Name 1010200800530910 10 10 2008 09 10 1010200800530920 10 10 2008 09 20 Status 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Select the form to delete and press Delete The delete confirmation screen appears 5 Press Yes The form is deleted OPERATION GUIDE 6 19 Document Box Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB memory without having to use a computer Limitations The following file types can be printed ePDF file Version 1 5 TIFF file TIFF V6 TTN2 format JPEG file XPS file Encrypted PDF file PDF files you wish to print should have an extension pdf Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine Plug the USB memory directly into the USB memory slot A1 We do not guarantee that USB memory printing is error free if a USB hub is used Printing Print documents stored in the removable USB mem
260. m the deletion of the data registered in the One Touch Key 8 56 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Sort Settings Select the default sort setting of the address for the address book The table below shows the available settings Displays the destination list in order of the registered number Displays the destination list in order of the registered name Use the procedure below to specify the Sort settings 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Edit Destination Next of Address Book Defaults and then Change of Sort 3 Select No or Name 4 Press OK Narrow Down Settings gi This procedure can be used to filter narrow down the types of destination listed when the address book is displayed The table below shows the available settings Item Detail Off Displays all destination types in the destination list E mail Displays only e mail destinations Folder Displays only folder SMB or FTP destinations FAX Displays only FAX destinations Displays only i FAX destinations Displays only groups Use the procedure below to specify the Narrow Down settings 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Edit Destination Next of Address Book Defaults and then Change of Narrow Down 3 Select the type of destination filter 4 Press OK OPERATION GUIDE 8 57 Default Setting System Menu Internet Browser Setup This procedure sets up the Internet brow
261. multi purpose tray Load envelope with the print side facing up Landscape form envelopes S S Portrait form envelopes Cardstock Hagaki Return postcard Oufuku Hagaki NOTE Use unfolded return postcard Oufuku Hagaki IMPORTANT How to load envelopes orientation and facing will differ depending on the type of envelope Be sure to load it in correctly otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face NOTE When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray select the envelope type by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 28 OPERATION GUIDE 2 25 Preparation before Use Specifying Paper Size and Media The default paper size setting for cassettes 1 and 2 for multi purpose tray and for the optional paper feeder cassettes 3 and 4 is Auto and the default media type setting is Plain To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes specify the paper size and media type setting Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2 26 To fix the type of paper to be used in multi purpose tray specify the paper size setting Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 28 Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes 1 or 2 or the optional paper feeder cassettes 3 and 4 specify the paper si
262. n Name 1 amama Name 2 E mail Address mail Cancel 30 sec Search Timeout Off LDAP Security 4 OK 08 08 2009 10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password Press Next of User Login Setting Change of Obtain NW User Property Press On Press Server Name Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address and press OK Press keys to enter the LDAP port number using the numeric keys Press Name 1 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed and press OK Follow steps 9 and 10 above to set Name 2 Press E mail Address Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e mail address and press OK Press Search Timeout to set the amount of time to wait before time out Press or the numeric keys to enter the time Press LDAP Security to select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server Select Off LDAP over SSL or LDAPv3 TLS and press OK OPERATION GUIDE 11 13 Management Job Accounting Job accounting Manages the copy print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations e Manageability of up to 1 000 individual accounts e Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits betwee
263. n 0 and 99999999 for security e Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID e Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined e Restricting the print counter in one page increments up to 9 999 999 copies e Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined First Job Accounting Setup Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup Enable job accounting page 11 14 v Add an account page 11 16 v Log out page 11 15 v Other users login for operations page 11 15 Enabling Disabling Job Accounting Enable job accounting Use the procedure below to specify the job accounting setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting and then Change of Job Accounting 5 Press On To disable job accounting press Off 11 14 OPERATION GUIDE Management 6 Press OK NOTE When the display returns to the System Menu default screen logout is automatically executed and the screen to enter the Account ID appears To continue the operation enter the Account ID
264. n are shown below Item Description SMTP Protocol Enables or disables SMTP protocol To use E mail this protocol must be enabled SMTP Port Number Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25 SMTP Server Name Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name The maximum length of the SMTP server name and IP address is 64 characters If entering the name a DNS server address must also be configured The DNS server address may be entered on the TCP IP General tab SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds Authentication Protocol Enables or disables the SMTP authentication protocol or sets POP before SMTP as the protocol The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft Exchange 2000 Authenticate as Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a different account Login User Name When Other is selected for Authenticate the login user name set here will be used for SMTP authentication The maximum length of the login user name is 64 characters Login Password When Other is selected for Authenticate the password set here will be used for authentication The maximum length of the login password is 64 characters POP before SMTP Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds when you have selected POP before SMTP as the Authentication Protocol Test This will test if the SMTP connection can be su
265. n concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces except that you may make one backup copy You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces unless sooner terminated This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not remedied within thirty 30 days after notice from Monotype Imaging When this License expires or is terminated you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested You agree that you will not modify alter disassemble decrypt reverse engineer or decompile the Software Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety 90 days after delivery the Software will perform in accordance with Monotype Imaging published specifications and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs errors and omissions The parties agree that all other warranties expressed or implied including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose and merchantability are excluded Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability
266. nals by E mail NOTE Refer to Send as E mail on page 3 24 OPERATION GUIDE 8 19 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to set the default e mail subject and message body 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults v and then Change of E mail Subject Body 3 Press Subject to enter an E mail subject not more than 60 characters NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 lt blue gt for details on entering characters Press OK 4 5 Press Body to enter an E mail Body not more than 500 characters 6 Press OK 7 Check that the entries are correct and press OK Border Erase Default Set the default width to be erased as a border The table below shows the measurement ranges that can be set Inch 0 to 2 in 0 01 increments Metric 0 mm to 50 mm in 1 mm increments NOTE Refer to page 4 17 and page 5 23 for Border Erase Use the procedure below to set the default border erase width 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults v and then Change of Border Erase Default 3 Press or for the Border and Gutter width to erase You can use the numeric keys to enter the number directly 4 Press OK Border Erase to Back Page Select the Border Erase Method for Back Page of a sheet The table below shows the available settings a Same as Front P
267. ncacecisnenamnninadascaammmsupeatd danaabeonamiwueabaadien 2 2 e Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables 2 3 COMMS CING CADIES ccoimisinccinanientinniesinkanlontinabnsidnaumetattnduniuntinesblesiied 2 5 PPO I OT irere EEE EEEE EEEREN 2 7 Sleep and AWO SIED eriei nAaR 2 9 e Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle c0 0c sceeseseeeeeeeeess 2 10 e Switching the Language for Display Language ceeeeee 2 10 See Date anma TE srra EIEEE penp ESERE 2 11 e Network Setup LAN Cable Connection cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 12 MSN SONO e a 2 15 e Embedded Web Server Settings for E mail ccseeeeeeeee 2 16 Dnon EA rnn aR EES 2 17 Loading Fapa crissanacnospinsncnendcotasateaprsaniccnrisiaatnanoannandaimhababnieieniaats 2 19 Loading Onga Seah 2 30 OPERATION GUIDE 2 1 Preparation before Use Check the Accessories Check that the following accessories are included e Operation Guide This Guide e CD ROM Product Library Documents Contained in the Included CD ROM The following documents are contained in the included CD ROM Product Library Refer to them as necessary Documents Embedded Web Server Operation Guide Printing System Driver User Guide Network FAX Driver Operation Guide TWAIN WIA Driver Operation Guide Network Tool for Direct Printing Operation Guide Network Print Monitor User Guide Scan to SMB PC Setup Guide Data Security Kit
268. nd retrieval system without permission in writing from the Publisher Introduction Thank you for your purchase of d Copia 4200MF 5200MF This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly perform routine maintenance and take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary so that you can always use the machine in good condition Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine and keep it close to the machine for easy reference We recommend the use of our own brand supplies We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine A label shown in the illustration assures that the supplies are our own brand In this Operation Guide d Copia 4200MF 5200MF are referred to as 42 ppm model and 52 ppm model respectively Included Guides The following guides are supplied with the machine Refer to them as necessary Operation Guide This Guide Describes how to load paper basic copy print and scan operations and troubleshooting Safety Conventions in This Guide The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user other individuals and surrounding objects and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine The symbols and their meanings are indicated below WARNING Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the
269. nd the shared boxes 3 40 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Password Entry Requirement When user login administration is enabled requirement of a password differs depending on the level of privileges as follows Administrator The administrator is not required to enter a password to gain access to any box User The user is required to enter a password to gain access to a box which is protected by a password The user is not required to enter a password to gain access to his her own boxes Creating new Custom Boxes when user login administration is enabled If you create a new Custom Box when user login administration is enabled the screen appears and you can change the owner and permission settings Only administrators and machine administrators can create new Custom Boxes Box No Owner Change 0001 DCBA9876 2 Box Name Usage Restriction Change SALES 21 GB 2 Box Password Permission Change KRKK Private 2 gt Sara EET Changing the owner Press Change of Owner and 30 day s Permit select the new owner for the Free Space Delete after Printed Gans box from the displayed list soe a a Then press OK ae e Changing the permission Press Change of 05 06 2000 10 10 Permission and select either Private or Shared Then press OK NOTE For information on specifying other settings refer to Creating a New Custom Box on page 6 2 Working With User Privileges When User Login Administ
270. ner Replace the toner container Box is not found This job is canceled because the specified box cannot be found Press End Box limit exceeded Document box is full and no further storage is available Job is canceled Press End Repeat Copy box is full and no further repeat copy is available Press Continue to print scanned pages Press Cancel to cancel the job Cannot connect to Authentication Server An error has occurred when connecting to the authentication server Refer to Responding to Authentication Server Connection Error for the error message and corrective actions 10 6 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting Error Message Cannot duplex print on this paper Checkpoints Did you select a paper size media type that cannot be duplex printed Corrective Actions Select the available paper type Press Continue to print without using Duplex Reference Page Cannot execute this job This job is canceled because it is restricted by Job Accounting Press End Cannot offset this paper Did you select a paper size media type that cannot be offset Select the available paper size type Press Continue to print without using Offset Cannot print the specified number of copies Only one copy is available due to processing too many jobs in parallel Press Continue to continue printing Press Cancel to cancel the job
271. ng Keys Auto Standard X 5 83 17 00 Y 3 86 11 69 Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others Cancel J amp OK 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Press OK The previous screen reappears NA 5 Press Change of Media Type and select the ij Select type of paper in Multi Purpose Tray media type Then press OK Transparency Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted E EE ij Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick High Quality Custom 1 Custom 2 a 3 a a 4 F Custom 5 Custom 6 Custom 7 Custom 8 Cancel a OK 08 08 2009 10 10 OPERATION GUIDE 2 29 Preparation before Use Loading Originals Follow the steps below to load originals for copying sending or storing Placing Originals on the Platen You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals 1 Open the original cover NOTE If the optional document processor is installed open the document processor Before opening the document processor be sure that there are no originals left on the original table or on the original eject table Originals left on the original table or on the original eject table may fall off when the document processor is opened Keep the document processor open if the original is 40 mm or thicker 2 Place the original Put the scanning side facedown and align it flush against the original size indicator plates with the back left corn
272. ng A new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time Types of the counts are as follows Item Detail Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed and the total number of pages used You can also use Count by Paper Size and Count by Duplex Combine to check the number of pages used e For copying you can check the pages used for black and white copying For printing you can check the pages used for black and white printing e You can use Count by Paper Size to check the number of pages used in the paper size set in Counting by Paper Size on page 11 25 as well as the number of pages used in other paper sizes e You can use the Count by Duplex Combine to check the number of pages used in Duplex 1 sided mode Duplex 2 sided mode and the total for both as well as the pages used in Combine None mode Combine 2in1 mode Combine 4in1 mode and the total for all three Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying faxing and other functions as well as the total number of pages scanned FAX Transmission Pages Displays the number of pages faxed FAX Transmission Time Displays the total duration of fax transmissions g Only displayed when the optional fax kit is installed Total Job Accounting Resetting the Counter This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those ac
273. ng the gear at the left end of the roller 9 6 OPERATION GUIDE Maintenance 5 Put away the cleaning brush press the specified position of the front cover and left cover 1 to close 9 7 OPERATION GUIDE Maintenance Toner Container and Waste Toner Box Replacement When the touch panel displays Add toner replace the toner without delay even if several more copies are still possible When replacing the toner container replace the waste toner box as well Every time you replace the toner container be sure to clean the parts as instructed below Dirty parts may deteriorate output quality CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box Dangerous sparks may cause burns CAUTION Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box 1 Open the front cover MM L MUMMY J LLY SI 2 Push upthe toner container stopper and slowly pull out the used toner container until its handle is visible WARNING High voltage parts inside Handle with care because there is a danger of electric shock IMPORTANT Do not pull the toner container all the way out without holding the handle otherwise it will drop 9 8 OPERATION GUIDE Maintenance 3 Keep the stopper up hold the toner container handle and take out slowly 4 Unwrap anew
274. nistrator 0004 Document4 Administrator Joining Documents 08 08 2009 10 10 7 To copy or move the document to a custom box select the destination box To copy the document to USB memory select the destination folder and press Next If necessary set the saved file size and the file format etc 8 Press Move or Copy and then press Yes in the confirmation screen The selected document is moved or copied NOTE If the box to which the document is to be moved or copied is protected by a password enter the correct password The procedure for joining documents in a custom box is explained below NOTE You can only join a document to other documents in the same custom box If necessary move the documents to be joined beforehand ical File Name 4 Date and Time ool 5 0404200710574501 10 10 2008 09 40 21 MB oo 4 El 0404200710574511 10 10 2008 09 50 21 MB 001 WV l 0404200710574521 10 10 2008 10 00 21 MB search Name Detail Preview Vv emia Delete Store File Close 08 08 2009 10 10 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Custom Box select the box containing the documents you want to join and press Open NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password 3 Select the documents in the list that you wish to join by pressing the checkbox The document is marked with a checkmark You can join up
275. nter the information and then press OK The table below lists the items to be set Item Detail Enter the box number by pressing or number keys The box number can be from 0001 to 1000 A Custom Box should have a unique number If you enter 0000 the smallest number available will be automatically assigned Box Name Enter a box name consisting of up to 32 characters Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 for details on entering characters Box Password User access to the box can be restricted by specifying a password to protect the box Entering a password is not mandatory Enter the same password of up to 16 characters in both Password and Confirm Password 6 2 OPERATION GUIDE Document Box Item Detail Usage Restriction To preserve the hard disk capacity the storage capacity for a box can be restricted To enable a capacity restriction enter a value for the storage capacity of the Custom Box in megabytes by pressing or number keys You can enter a limit between 1 and 30 000 Changes according to the number of created custom boxes Auto File Deletion Automatically deletes stored documents after a set period of time Press On to enable automatic deletion and then use and or the numeric keys to enter the number of days for which documents are stored You can enter any number between 1 and 31 day s To disable automatic file deletion press Off O
276. o For duplex copying press Back Page and select Top Bottom 0 75 0 75 Back Page E o PERA Auto or Manual Top Edge Top 1 Original Orientation 08 08 2009 10 10 OPERATION GUIDE 4 15 Copying Functions Ready to copy Margin Centering Back Page Place original Add Shortcut Add Shortcut Copies Left Right 0 75 0 75 X i 08 08 2009 10 10 Copies Top Edge Top Original Orientation 08 08 2009 10 10 If you selected Auto press OK If you pressed Manual enter the margins in the displayed screen and then press OK Press Centering to center the original image on the paper Press Original Orientation to choose orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Then press OK Press OK Press the Start key to start copying 4 16 OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Border Erase Use Border Erase to remove black shadows that appear around the outside of the original when making copies The following options can be selected Border Erase Sheet Erases black borders around the single sheet original Original Border Erase Book Erases black borders around the edges and in the middle of the original such as a thick book You can specify the widths individually to erase the borders around the edges and in the center of the book Original Individual Bor
277. o gt Alt Emulation 3 Select the desired alternative emulation and then press OK 4 Press OK Setting of KPDL error report When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode set whether or not the error report is output The default setting is Off not output Use the procedure below to specify the KPDL error report setting 1 Press the System Menu Key 2 Press Printer gt Change of Emulation gt KPDL or KPDL Auto gt KPDL Error Report 3 Press On or Off and then press OK 4 Press OK EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a problem Use the procedure below to specify the EcoPrint setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer and Change of EcoPrint 3 Press Off or On 4 Press OK Override A4 Letter Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter which are similar in size as the same size when printing The table below shows the available settings Item Description A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size The machine will use whichever size is in the paper source A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size Use the procedure below to specify the override A4 Letter setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer and Change of Override A4 Letter 3 Press Off or On 4 Press OK OPERATION GUIDE 8 35 Default Setting System M
278. ob ends the reserved copy job is printed OPERATION GUIDE 3 15 Basic Operation Interrupt Copy This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately When interruption copy ends the machine resumes the paused print jobs NOTE You can change the delay until interrupt copying is cancelled Change the delay as required For more information refer to Interrupt Clear Timer on page 8 50 Ready for interrupt copy omy 1 Press the Interrupt key poma Ready for interrupt copy is displayed CZA a The current print job is temporarily interrupted Shortcut 3 Auto 100 Normal 0 Shortcut 4 riginal i 5 A A Zoom Shortcut 5 Paper i 2 sided 2in1 off g gt gt 2 sided s Quick Setup Org Paper Image Quality Layout Edit Advanced Finishing Setul 08 08 2009 10 10 2 Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt copy and configure the copy settings Press the Start key to start interrupt copying 4 When interrupt copying ends press the Interrupt key The machine resumes the paused print jobs 3 16 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Staple Use this feature to staple your finished copies NOTE Stapling requires the optional built in finisher document finisher or 3 000 sheet document finisher Note also that saddle stitching center stapling requires the folding unit The following stapling options and orientations are a
279. ocations near radiators heaters or other heat sources or locations near flammable items to avoid the danger of fire S To keep the machine cool and facilitate changing of parts and maintenance allow access space as shown below Leave adequate space especially around the rear cover to allow air to be properly Q ventilated out of the machine 23 15 16 t 10 cm A E 2 11 13 16 30 cm 2 11 13 16 30 cm Other precautions The service environmental conditions are as follows e Temperature 50 to 90 5 F 10to 32 5 C e Humidity 15 to 80 However adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine e Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight e Avoid locations with vibrations e Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations X OPERATION GUIDE e Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air e Avoid poorly ventilated locations If the floor is delicate against casters when this machine is moved after installation the floor material may be damaged During copying some ozone is released but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one s health If however the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies the smell may become unpleasant To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work it is suggeste
280. ocument processor and wipe the slit glass a 3 Wipe the white guide b on the document processor 4 When using the document processor to allow dual scanning open the top cover of the document processor OPERATION GUIDE Maintenance 5 Wipe the slit glass iii i D ft hi j 6 Wipe the white roller 7 Close the document processor top cover and return the cleaning cloth to the cleaning cloth compartment 8 Press End Separator Clean the separator regularly at least monthly to ensure optimum output quality 1 Open the front cover MW S 8 NIIN N N N SI SY A 9 4 OPERATION GUIDE Maintenance 2 Remove cleaning brush blue colored 3 Pull up and open left cover 1 4 Asshown in the figure clean dirt from the separator by moving the brush from side to side along the separator 5 Put away the cleaning brush press the specified position of the front cover and left cover 1 to close OPERATION GUIDE Maintenance Transfer Roller 1 Open the front cover MM L LJ J LLY O 2 Remove the cleaning brush blue colored 3 Pull up and open left cover 1 4 As shown in the figure clean dirt from the transfer roller by moving the brush from side to side along the roller while rotating the roller by turni
281. of Auto or of Manual 4 Press 3 3 Lighter Darker to adjust density 5 Press OK 8 42 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Print Density Adjust print density Adjustment can be made in 5 levels Use the procedure below to adjust the print density 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press v Adjustment Maintenance and then Change of Print Density 3 Press 1 5 Lighter Darker to adjust density 4 Press OK Drum Refresh Refresh the drum when image blur or white spots appear on images in copies NOTE Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done To use Drum Refresh load Ledger or A3 size paper into the Multi Purpose tray Use the procedure below to refresh the drum gg 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Adjustment Maintenance 3 Press Next of Drum Refresh 4 Press Execute to perform Drum Refresh 5 After Drum Refresh is completed press OK to return to the Adjustment Maintenance screen OPERATION GUIDE 8 43 Default Setting System Menu Correcting Fine Black Lines Correct fine black lines black streaks caused by contamination which may appear on the copies when the optional document processor used Paper feed direction i The table below shows the available settings Description Off No correction performed On Low Correction performed The reproduction of the image be
282. of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts upon their return to Monotype Imaging In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits lost data or any other incidental or consequential damages or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces Massachusetts U S A law governs this Agreement You shall not sublicense sell lease or otherwise transfer the Software and or Typefaces without the prior written consent of Monotype Imaging Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252 227 7013 subdivision b 3 ii or subparagraph c 1 ii as appropriate Further use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52 227 19 c 2 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement understand it and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party By opening this diskette package you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement xxiv OPERATION GUIDE Energy Saving Control Function The device comes equipped with a Sleep whe
283. ogin Password Enter the password to login up to 64 characters Access Level Select Administrator or User for user access privileges Account Name Add an account where the user belongs The user who registered his her account name can login without entering the account ID Refer to Job Accounting on page 11 14 E mail Address The user can register his her E mail address The registered address will be automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any E mail function Mandatory at user registration NOTE By default one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored Each user s properties are Machine Administrator User Name DeviceAdmin Login User Name 42 ppm model 4200 52 ppm model 5200 Login Password 42 ppm model 4200 52 ppm model 5200 Access Level Machine Administrator When the optional Data Security Kit is installed the login user name and login user password are as shown below 1 1 42 ppm model 42004200 52 ppm model 52005200 Administrator User Name Admin Login User Name Admin Login Password Admin Access Level Administrator When the optional Data Security Kit is installed the login user name and login user password are same It is recommended to periodically change the user name login user name and login password regularly for your security Use the procedure below to register a new user Login as a user w
284. om the toner container or the waste toner box avoid inhalation and ingestion S as well as contact with your eyes and skin e Ifyou do happen to inhale toner move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water If coughing develops contact a physician e Ifyou do happen to ingest toner rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of your stomach If necessary contact a physician e Ifyou do happen to get toner in your eyes flush them thoroughly with water If there is any remaining tenderness contact a physician e If toner does happen to get on your skin wash with soap and water Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box S If the optional Fax kit is installed and the main power switch is off transmitting receiving Fax is disabled Do not turn off the main power switch but press the Power key on the operation panel to enter Sleep Other precautions Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and humidity If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time remov
285. omp PDF Send files in High Comp PDF format refer to page 5 14 NOTE Refer to page 5 12 for file formats OPERATION GUIDE 8 17 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to select the default file format 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of File Format 3 Select the default file format 4 Press OK File Separation Select the default file separation setting The available default settings are shown below __s eee Off No file separation performed all the pages are compiled in one file Each Page Each scanned page is created into a separate file NOTE Refer to page 5 13 for file separation Use the procedure below to select the default file separation 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of File Separation 3 Select the default for Off or Each Page Press OK Density Set the default density The available default settings are shown below o ee rr ee Manual Normal 0 Set to Normal 0 in the Manual density Auto Set to Auto density Use the procedure below to select the default density 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults v and then Change of Density 3 Select the default density 4 Press OK 8 18 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System
286. ompression PDF format Scan to USB Fax Box Fax Box stores the fax data received For details refer to the Operation Guide supplied with the fax kit 3 34 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Basic Operation for Document Box This section explains basic operations for document boxes using examples where tasks are carried out with custom boxes NOTE In the following explanation it is assumed that user login administration is enabled For details on User Logon privileges refer to User Privileges on page 3 40 The basic procedure for using document boxes is explained below a Custom Box A No a Name a Owner Used Area B SALES Anonymous Search Name Search No Register Edit Box Store File Custom Box 08 08 2009 10 10 T Custom Box 0001 ge 0001 Box 0002 0002 Box 0003 0003 Box Custom Box 08 08 2009 10 10 1 Press the Document Box key The default document box screen appears 2 Press Custom Box Job Box or Removable Memory to select the type of document box you want to work with In this example press Custom Box The box list screen appears You can use this screen for tasks such as registering and editing boxes For more information on using the box list refer to Custom Box List on page 3 36 NOTE For more information on registering boxes refer to Creating a New Custom Box on page 6 2 You cannot access boxes if you
287. on 4 Press Register Edit The address book appears Select a destination contact or group to add to the One Touch Key number Pressing Detail shows the detailed information of the selected destination NOTE Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 30 for Address List 6 Press OK The destination will be added to the One Touch Key Editing One Touch Key Edit delete the destinations you added to One Touch Key OPERATION GUIDE 8 55 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to edit the One Touch key 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Edit Destination and then Register Edit of One Touch Key 3 Selecta One Touch Key number 0001 to 1000 for the destination Pressing Quick No Search key or No enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited Changing the Registered Information 1 Press Register Edit 2 Select a new destination Contact or group Pressing Detail shows the detailed information of the selected destination NOTE Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 30 for Address List 3 Press OK 4 Press Yes on the screen to add the destination to the One Touch Key Deleting the Registered Information 1 Press Delete 2 Press Yes on the screen to confir
288. or example you can specify the speed dial for a transmission destination or recall a stored program by its program number The Quick No Search key performs the same action as the No displayed on the touch panel The use of the Quick No Search key is explained below using an example in which a speed dial number is specified and used to select a destination For more information on speed dialing refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 30 1 Press the Quick No Search key or No in the basic send screen al Ready to send as 2 Inthe number entry screen use the numeric keys Place original 1 to enter the speed dial number Destination Detail IPM Address gt A OFFICE ee ee Biz i 3 If you entered speed dial number between 1 and 3 m E mail i Addr Entry Enter One Touch key number using 2 Keys Folder Path 0001 1000 Entry ce ae oot g FAK No The specified destination appears in the Entry 5 my j destination list jai a Caray digits long press the Enter key or OK 2 0006 1 100 WSD Scan Eaa EEFE NOTE If you enter a 4 digit speed dial number the Data Format Image Quali BETE operation in step 3 can be omitted The basic send screen appears and the specified destination appears in the destinations list OPERATION GUIDE 3 3 Basic Operation Touch Panel Display Display for Originals and Paper The touch panel displays the selected paper source and output tray
289. or moving the machine contact your service representative When moving the machine please turn the four adjusters of the paper feeding unit until they reach the floor in order to stabilize the machine Do not touch electrical parts such as connectors or printed circuit boards They could be damaged by static electricity Do not attempt to perform any operations not explained in this guide Caution Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure Do not look directly at the light from the scanning lamp as it may cause your eyes to feel tired or painful This machine comes equipped with an HDD hard disk drive Do not attempt to move the machine while the power is still on Since any resulting shock or vibration may cause damage to the hard disk be sure to turn off the power before attempting to move the machine In the event there is a problem with the machine s HDD hard disk drive stored data may be erased It is recommended that important data be backed up on a PC or other media Be also sure to store originals of important documents separately OPERATION GUIDE xiii Cautions when handling consumables A CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box Dangerous sparks may cause S burns Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children S If toner happens to spill fr
290. ory 1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot A1 IMPORTANT Use USB memory formatted by this machine If a USB memory formatted by any other device is used The removable memory is not formatted may appear To format a USB memory press Format and follow the instructions on the screen 2 When the machine reads the USB memory Removable Memory is recognized Displaying files may appear Press Yes to display the removable memory screen NOTE If the message does not appear press the Document Box key and then Removable Memory 3 Select the folder containing the file to be printed and press Open The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels including the root folder NOTE To return to a higher level folder press Up 6 20 OPERATION GUIDE Document Box ie Removable Memory 4 Select the file to be printed and press Print a jovable Memory jv Name Ta Date and Time Ta Size VY A 1 Document 10 10 2008 09 30 LJ 2 Document 10 10 2008 09 40 LJ D 3 Document 10 10 2008 09 50 Memory LJ 4 Document 10 10 2008 10 00 Information g D 5 Document 10 10 2008 10 05 Remove Memory Store File 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Change the number of copies duplex printing etc as desired 6 Press the Start key Printing of the selected file begins Removing USB Memory Remove the USB memory IMPORTANT Be sure to follow the proper procedure to
291. paper sizes can be added Select media type for each paper size Media type Plain Transparency Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick Envelope High Quality Custom 1 8 NOTE Refer to Paper Weight on page 8 7 for Custom 1 8 for media type Use the procedure below to select a custom paper size and media type Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings and then Next of Custom Paper Size Press Change of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4 on which you want to register the size Press On and then press or numeric keys to enter X horizontal and Y vertical dimensions Press Media Type to select the type of paper and press OK if necessary Press OK Nn Oo oOo fF W N Move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1 2 and optional paper feeders Cassette 3 and 4 The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below Item Description Auto Automatically detect paper size Select Metric or Inch for paper size Standard Available options are as follows Sizes 1 Inch models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement R 8 5 13 5 Oficio II Metric models A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R Folio Standard Select a standard size except that selected in Standard Sizes
292. per Settings and then Next of Media Type Setting 3 Press Next for the media type whose weight you want to change 4 Press Change of Paper Weight 5 Select the weight and press OK 6 Press Close The previous screen reappears 7 To change the duplex printing settings for Custom 1 8 press Next of Custom 1 8 and then Change of Duplex Select Prohibit or Permit and press OK The previous screen reappears 8 Press Close 9 To change the name for Custom 1 8 press Next of Custom 1 8 and then Change of Name Enter the name and press OK NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 lt blue gt for details on entering characters 8 8 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1 4 and Multi Purpose Tray NOTE Cassette 3 is displayed when either of the optional paper feeder or 3 000 sheet paper feeder is installed and Cassette 4 is displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed Use the procedure below to select the default paper source Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings and then Change of Default Paper Source 1 2 3 Select a paper cassette for the default setting 4 Press OK 5 Move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key Automatic Detection of Originals Available for metric models only Automatically d
293. procedure below to select the default Reserve Next Priority setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Copy and Change of Reserve Next Priority 3 Select the default for Off or On 4 Press OK Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time Options are 1 999 copies Use the procedure below to set the limit on the number of copies 1 Press the System Menu key OPERATION GUIDE 8 27 Default Setting System Menu 2 Press Copy and Change of Preset Limit 3 Press or or use the numeric keys to enter the limit for the number of copies 4 Press OK Quick Setup Registration Select the copying functions to be registered for Quick Setup Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary Six items from the following options are available Paper Selection Zoom Staple Punch Density Duplex Combine Collate Offset Original Image Original Size Original Orientation Continuous Scan NOTE Refer to Quick Setup Screen on page 3 43 for the Quick Setup steps Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Copy and Next of Quick Setup Registration 3 Press Change of the function to be registered in Quick Setup 4 Select a key 1 6 allocated on the Quick Setup Registration screen Press Off to delete a key from the Quick Setup 5 Press OK If you overwrite
294. procedure below to specify the USB Device setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Interface Block Setting and then Change of USB Device 3 Press Block 4 Press OK Optional interface Optional interface card setting This locks and protects the optional interface slots OPT1 or OPT2 The default setting is Unblock Use the procedure below to specify the optional interface setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Interface Block Setting and then Change of Optional Interface 1 or Optional Interface 2 3 Press Block Press OK 8 72 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Security Level Security Level setting The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work There is no need for customers to use this menu Document Guard Setting When the optional Printed Document Guard Kit is installed the machine prevents the unauthorized copying and or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or personal information Use the Security Watermark of Advanced in KX DRIVER to embed the guard pattern in a document Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide for details We suggest you to confirm how the machine performs this function on your environment Print the guard pattern using KX DRIVER gt Canceled send or fax Machine Operation after Detecting the Document Guard Pattern
295. program use the procedure for registering a program and press Change Then change the program number and program name and press Register Choose Yes in the confirmation screen to change the program To delete the program press Delete this Program Choose Yes in the confirmation screen to finally delete the program OPERATION GUIDE 3 47 Basic Operation Registering Shortcuts Copy Send and Document Box Settings Add shortcuts in the Quick Setup screen for easy access to the frequently used functions A function name linked to a registered shortcut can be changed as necessary You can register up to 6 shortcuts for copying functions sending functions and functions set for document box Adding Shortcuts Shortcut registration is performed in the setup screen of each function Shortcuts can be registered for all functions in which Add Shortcut appears on the screen Use the procedure below to register a shortcut Ready to copy Copies Memo Page if Top LtoR RtoL None E Layout B X ia Border Line E Top Edge Top 9 Original Orientation 08 08 2009 10 10 Editing and Deleting Shortcuts After making the desired settings in the setup screen of each function press Add Shortcut 2 Press the keys corresponding to the shortcut number 01 to 06 to register NOTE If you select a shortcut number already registered the currently registered shortcut can be replaced
296. r High Quality Rough and Custom 1 to 8 2 26 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use 1 Press the System Menu key ystem Menu 2 Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings Next of Cassette Setting 3 Cassette Setting select one of Cassette 1 to Cassette 4 and press Next Then press Change of Paper Size NOTE Cassette 3 and Cassette 4 are shown when the optional paper feeder is installed 4 For automatic detection of the paper size press Auto and select Metric or Inch as the unit a To select the paper size press Standard Sizes 1 j Set cassette paper size or Standard Sizes 2 and select the paper size Letter gt Letter g Legal gt Statement m 8 5x13 5 Oficioll Cancel amp OK 08 08 2009 10 10 S2 Press OK The previous screen reappears o Press Change of Media Type and select the media type Then press OK Common Settings Media Type li Select type of paper in Cassette 1 Rough Vellum Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead High Quality Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Custom 4 Custom 5 Custom 6 Custom 7 Custom 8 Cancel e OK 08 08 2009 10 10 OPERATION GUIDE 2 27 Preparation before Use Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray To fix the type of paper to be used in the multi purpose tray specify the paper size When
297. r Symbol Entry Screen Limit 128 characters Input 0 characters Use the keyboard to enter JAAA 00 oo cs SSDs 000085600 EEE PEED EEr i Upper case Lower case i No Symbol Space Cancel lel OK Status 08 08 2009 10 10 Display Key Description LA v To enter a number or symbol not shown in the keyboard press the cursor key and scroll the screen to view other numbers or symbols to enter OPERATION GUIDE Appendix 11 Entering Characters Follow the steps shown below to enter List A 1 for example 1 Press Upper case 2 Press L The letter L is shown on the display L E EN o LELEI RS L Backspace YS JER A E a a ES EN ES a A 2S cee Lower case No Symboi Space Cancel fa OK J 08 08 2009 10 10 3 Press Lower case 4 Press i s t and Space es eee Lt ET gt Backspace FAAATA e ICICI Deseo eceeoos Upper case RIES No Symbol Space Cancel a K J 5 Press Upper case 6 Press A 7 Press No Symbol 8 Press A or v repeatedly to view the keyboard containing and 1 9 Press and 1 Use the keyboard to enter ee ee o 4 LAILI za i Backspace F gggaaaaaAeHaA e ee WIG IIL We reece Loc seed cancel a o J 08 08 2009 10 10 10 Check that the entry is correct Press OK Appendix 12 OPERATION GUIDE Paper This section explains the paper size
298. r copies Ready to copy copies Memo Page None Border Line Top Edge Top Original Orientation 08 08 2009 10 10 1 2 3 4 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Layout Edit and then Memo Page Press Layout A or Layout B Select the page layout from Layout Press Border Line to select the page boundary line Press OK Press Original Orientation to select orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Press OK Press OK Press the Start key to start copying 4 26 OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Image Repeat Double Copy Tiles the 1 copied sheet with an original image You can also specify the area of the original to repeat Image Repeat Copies the original image multiple times onto 1 sheet at a specified magnification You can also specify how much of the original is repeatedly copied i Original Copy Double Copy Makes 2 copies of the same original on a single sheet For example you can double copy an A4 original onto an A3 sheet which you then cut in half to make 2 copies that are identical to the original gt Original Copy Follow the steps as below to use Image Repeat Double Copy 1 Press Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Layout Edit and then press Image Repeat 4 Ready to copy Press Zoom
299. r enlarges the original image in 1 increments between 25 and 400 Preset Zoom Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications The following magnifications are available Model Zoom Level Original Copy Inch Models 100 Auto 400 Max 200 STMT gt gt Ledger 154 STMT gt gt Legal 129 Letter gt gt Ledger 121 Legal gt gt Ledger 78 Legal gt gt Letter 77 Ledger gt gt Legal 64 Ledger gt gt Letter 50 Ledger gt gt STMT 25 Min Metric Models 100 Auto 400 Max 200 A5 gt gt A3 141 A4 gt gt A3 A5 gt gt A4 127 Folio gt gt A3 106 11 15 gt gt A3 90 Folio gt gt A4 75 11 15 gt gt A4 70 A3 gt gt A4 A4 gt gt A5 50 25 Min Metric Models Asia 100 Auto 400 Max 200 A5 gt gt A3 Pacific 141 A4 gt gt A3 B5 gt gt B4 122 A4 gt gt B4 A5 gt gt B5 115 B4 gt gt A3 B5 gt gt A4 86 A3 gt gt B4 A4 gt gt B5 81 B4 gt gt A4 B5 gt gt A5 70 A3 gt gt A4 B4 gt gt B5 50 25 Min OPERATION GUIDE 3 9 Basic Operation XY Zoom The procedure for using zoom copying is explained below Ready to copy Ready to copy E Standard l 7anm pa XY Zoom Place original 25 400 400 E EI Keys Copies 100 Legal 121 gt gt Ledger E Auto 08 08 2009 10 10 25 4
300. r ikes eres bAa AEE ee Primer SetiigS sissien iaaiiai A e Printing Reports Sending NOE scsiississcssiccassarcrdsevanciietiummetvdincs 8 39 e Adjustment Maintenancee cccecseceeeeeessseeeeeeeesessstsseeeeesssssteeee sOP42 Date MET sorrie ninenin AOE T e Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys 8 51 ntemet Browser SSW sericea ani 8 58 AO A teased e EEE E A EE A N A T 8 63 Restarting the Syste iidisceviiaisiniainanireaanaaieninledianinmneeada ae Network Se nett eee cece caeeheaucieleaieas 8 64 CS FG aucona e Interface Block Seti sisisicscctecarin concours e Security Level Security Level ISON O 8473 Document Guard Setting scsccvewiaiskerraaciesieiniacanensinsiiedsent a s Dpional FUNCIONS resum a o e Accessibility Display Enlarged Touch Panel Display 8 77 OPERATION GUIDE 8 1 Default Setting System Menu Common Settings Common settings include Switching the Language for Display Language 8 2 Default Screen 8 2 Sound 8 3 Original Paper Settings 8 4 Switching Unit of Measurement 8 11 Error Handling 8 12 Paper Output 8 14 Orientation Confirmation 8 15 Function Defaults 8 15 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Switching the Language for Display Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel Use th
301. r less Rough Transparency Vellum 64 g m or less Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick 91 g m and more High Quality and Custom 1 8 To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Paper Weight on page 8 7 sa To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 8 10 NOTE If the optional FAX kit is installed and the multi purpose tray is used to print a received FAX the available media types are as shown below Plain Recycled Bond Color High Quality Rough and Custom 1 to 8 2 28 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use 1 Press the System Menu key ystem Menu 2 Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings Next of MP Tray Setting and then Change of Paper Size a a For automatic detection of the paper size press Set the multi purpose tray paper size Auto and select Metric or Inch as the unit To select the paper size press any of Standard A d 7 Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others or Size Auto Statement fend 9 sss ae gt Entry and select the paper size Standard i Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others Size Entry f 08 08 2009 10 10 E E If you have chosen Size Entry press or to Bic enone pare enter X horizontal and Y vertical sizes You may z enter the size directly using the numeric keys by pressi
302. r the proxy address and press OK 2 Press Keys and enter the port number To set domains for which no proxy is used 1 Press Keyboard of Do Not Use Proxy for Following Domains enter the domain name and press OK NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 lt blue gt for details on entering characters 4 Press OK OPERATION GUIDE 8 59 Default Setting System Menu Applications You can install and use applications that will make your day to day use of this machine more efficient Installing Applications You can install new applications Use the procedure below to install an application 1 Insert the USB memory containing the application to be installed into the USB memory slot A1 NOTE If Removable Memory is recognized Displaying files appears press No 2 Press the System Menu key 3 Press v and then Application NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Add Select the application to be installed and press Install You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail 6 When the confirmation screen appears press Yes Installation of the application begins Dependin
303. r to Minimum Statement R Capacity Plain paper 80 g m Colored paper Recycled paper 100 sheets Mixed sized originals 30 sheets Thick paper 120 g m2 66 sheets Thick paper 160 g m2 50 sheets Art paper 1 sheet High quality paper 110 g m 72 sheets Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals Soft originals such as vinyl sheets Transparencies such as OHP film Carbon paper Originals with very slippery surfaces Originals with adhesive tape or glue Wet originals Originals with correction fluid which is not dried Irregularly shaped non rectangular originals Originals with cut out sections Crumpled paper Originals with folds Straighten the folds before loading Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam Originals bound with clips or staples Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls wrinkles or creases before loading Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam 2 32 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use How to Load Originals IMPORTANT Before loading originals be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam 1 Adjust the original width guides to fit the originals 2 Place the originals Put the side to be scanned or the first side of two sided originals face up Slide the leading edg
304. r when the paper source and type are specified The table below shows the available settings C me a ee Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source Use the procedure below to select the paper feed mode 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer v and Change of Paper Feed Mode 3 Press Auto or Fixed 4 Press OK 8 38 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Printing Reports Sending Notice Print reports to check the machine settings and status Default settings for printing the result reports can also be configured NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only print by logging in with administrator privileges Printing Reports Printable reports are as follows Status Page Check the information including current settings available memory space and optional equipment installed Status Page MFP Font List Check the font samples installed in the machine Scalable Bitmap Passwor election FSET Font Name Scalable Bitmap Passwor d Selection FSET Font ID EEEHEHI Pitti onal LETT onan OPERATION GUIDE 8 39 Default Setting System Menu Network Status Page Check the information including network interface firmware version network address and protocol Network Status Page MFP Fi
305. ration is Enabled When user login administration is enabled the owner of ie at a box with user privileges set can change the following 0901 DCBA9876 box information the box name the box password the x Name ange sage Restriction ission th to fil letion and th verwrit bate Chang Usage Restrict a the auto file deletion and the ove e Box Password Change Permission Change JERE 2 Private gt Auto File Deletion Change Overwrite Setting Change 30 day s gt Permit gt Free Space Delete after Printed Change 30 GB Off 2 Cancel l Register 08 08 2009 10 10 NOTE It is assumed that a custom Document Box has already been created and registered For information on creating registering Document Boxes refer to Creating a New Custom Box on page 6 2 OPERATION GUIDE 3 41 Basic Operation Canceling Jobs Follow the steps below to cancel any print or send job being executed Canceling Jobs You can also cancel jobs by pressing the Stop key Printing jobs 1 Press the Stop key Cancelling job screen appears The current print job is temporarily interrupted 2 Select the job you wish to cancel and press Cancel And then press Yes in the confirmation screen Sending jobs 1 Press the Stop key Job Cancel appears NOTE Pressing the Stop key will not temporarily stop a job that you have already started sending 2 To cancel printing select Cancel and then press Yes in
306. rd layouts the same as a PC keyboard Press the System Menu key Common Settings and then Change of Keyboard Layout to choose desired layout QWERTY layout is used here as an example You may use another layout following the same steps Entry Screens Lower case Letter Entry Screen Use the keyboard to enter Display Key Display Limit 128 characters Input 0 characters esses eee LL EI JEN EA ES AO E a A E ekeke e a a lta el ada Cancel a OK 08 08 2009 10 10 Description Displays entered characters Limit Display Displays maximum number of characters Cursor Key Press to move the cursor on the display Backspace Press to delete a character to the left of the cursor Keyboard Press a character to enter Upper case Press to use upper case letters Lower case Press to use lower case letters No Symbol Press to enter numbers and symbols Space Press to insert a space Appendix 10 OPERATION GUIDE Display Key Description Cancel Press to cancel entered characters and return to the screen before the entry OK Press to finalize entry and return to the screen before the entry Upper case Letter Entry Screen Use the keyboard to enter Limit 128 characters Input Ocharacters WiLL ILI FEN e ES NOaG WII IIL Lower case No Symboi Space Cancel 08 08 2009 10 10 Numbe
307. re password The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows Detail Compatibility Acrobat 4 0 or later Select the version that is compatible with the PDF file Acrobat 5 0 or later Password to Off On Enter the password to open the PDF file Open Document Password to Enter the password to edit the PDF file Edit Print When you have entered the password to edit print Document document you can specifically limit the operation When you send a PDF file use the procedure below to encrypt the PDF file for transmission 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Original Sending Data Format File Format PDF or High Comp PDF and Encryption a 4 Press y of Compatibility select Acrobat 4 0 and Compatibility Acrobat 4 0 and later later or Acrobat 5 0 and later Encryption Level Middle 40 bit Frewer to ooen a Password 5 When you enter the password to open the PDF file Confirmation select On of Password to Open Document gt 6 Press Password enter a password up to 256 characters and then press OK to Edit Print Document Password al y Confirmation NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page m a a Appendix 10 for details on entering characters 08 08 2009 10 10 7 Press Confirmation and enter the password again for confirmation Then press OK 8 When you enter the p
308. re printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of time since the device was last used Sleep The device automatically enters Sleep when 8 minutes have passed since the device was last used The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened For more information see Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 9 Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function This device includes 2 sided copying as a standard function For example by copying two 1 sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a 2 sided copy it is possible to lower the amount of paper used For more information see Duplex Copying on page 3 11 Paper Recycling This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types Energy Star ENERGY STAR Program We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that p q this product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program Lmtd ENERGY STAR OPERATION GUIDE XXV About this Operation Guide This Operation Guide contains the following chapters Chapter 1 Part Names Identifies machine parts and operation panel keys Chapter 2 Preparation before Use Explains adding paper placing o
309. reset time is 8 minutes OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle Adjust the angle of the operation panel in two as shown by releasing the operation panel lock lever Switching the Language for Display Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel Use the procedure below to select the language 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings and then Change of Language aie 3 Press the key for the language you want to use il Set the language to use for the touch panel display 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Press OK The touch panel language will be changed 2 10 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use Setting Date and Time Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation When you send an E mail using the transmission function the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of the E mail message Set the date time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter a login user name and password and press Login Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password Be sure to set the time differenc
310. ress OK 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Press the Start key Copying begins OPERATION GUIDE 3 7 Basic Operation Selecting Image Quality Select image quality suited to the type of original The table below shows the quality options Image Quality Option Description Text Photo For originals with both text and photographs Text For originals primarily consisting of text Photo For photos taken with a camera Printed Document For documents printed from this machine The procedure for selecting the quality of copies is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Set the original on the platen and press Image Quality gt Original Image Ready to copy Copies 4 Select the image quality onom amos 5 Press OK ij Select original image type for best results Printed Document Suitable for documents printed from this machine Fa P Place original ma Text Photo Text Photo Printed Document Cancel Py OK 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Press the Start key Copying begins 3 8 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Zoom Copying Adjust the magnification to reduce or enlarge the original image The following zoom options are available Auto Zoom Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image suitably to the selected paper size C3 Statement R 64 HHI lt A5 70 Manual Zoom Manually reduces o
311. ress of SMTP on the Embedded Web Server 2 17 Failed to send via FTP Select On of the secure protocol settings on the Embedded Web Server Failed to send via FTP Check the followings of the FTP server Is FTPS available Is the encryption available Failed to send via SMB Failed to send via FTP Check the network and SMB settings Check the network and FTP settings The network cable is connected The hub is not operating properly The server is not operating properly Host name and IP address Port number Failed to send the e mail Failed to send i FAX Check the network and Embedded Web Server The network cable is connected The hub is not operating properly POP3 server name of the POP3 user SMTP server name 10 12 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting Error Message Failed to send via FTP Failed to send the e mail Failed to send i FAX Corrective Actions Check the followings of the FTP server ls FTP available The server is not operating properly Check the network The network cable is connected The hub is not operating properly The server is not operating properly Reference Page Failed to send the e mail Failed to send via FTP Failed to send via SMB Failed to send i FAX Failed to send the e mail Failed to send via FTP Failed to send i FAX Failed to send via FTP Failed
312. riginals connecting the machine and necessary configurations before first use Chapter 3 Basic Operation Describes the procedures for basic copying printing and scanning Chapter 4 Copying Functions Describes the functions you can use when copying Chapter 5 Sending Functions Describes the functions you can use when sending originals Chapter 6 Document Box Provides a basic guide to using document boxes Chapter 7 Status Job Cancel Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device status and how to cancel fax transmission Chapter 8 Default Setting System Menu Describes the System Menu options for general machine operation Chapter 9 Maintenance Describes cleaning and toner replacement Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Explains how to handle error messages paper jams and other problems Chapter 11 Management Explains user login administration and job accounting Appendix Explains how to enter characters and lists the machine specifications Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine Provides information on media types and paper sizes Also includes a glossary of terms xxvi OPERATION GUIDE Conventions in This Guide The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description Convention Description Example Bold Indicates the opera
313. rmware Version ome e a Service Status Page More detailed information is available than on the Status Page Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose Use the procedure below to print a report 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Report and Next of Print Report 3 Press Print for the report you want to print Printing starts A confirmation screen appears Press Yes Send Result Report Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete The table below shows the available settings Off No result report printed On Result report automatically printed Transmitted images can also be attached to the FAX result report Error Only Result report printed only when a transmission ends in an error If two or more destinations are registered the reports are printed only for the destinations with the errors Transmitted images can also be attached to the FAX result report 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Report Next of Result Report Setting Next of Send Result Report and then Change of E mail Folder Press Off On or Error Only Press OK 8 40 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Report for Job Canceled before Sending Print a send result report when the job is canceled before being sent 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Report Next of Result Report Setting Next of Send Re
314. rnuananesviens Appendix 10 e PADE rnanan E Appendix 13 e Specifications a cowerctrierrsd en saivonssenicenaisdinsemnneenalisiseineneetiemiesin Appendix 21 GOSSA een rep oer ee One eter Pere neve ne tore heer a renen te ONG aP seer eae Appendix 27 OPERATION GUIDE Appendix 1 Optional Equipment Overview of Optional Equipment The following optional equipment is available for the machine Document Table Document Processor Dual scan DP Document Processor Job Separator Built in Finisher a5 3 S o co Ow O n oo Se Og Paper Feeder 3 000 Sheet Document Finisher Document Finisher OPERATION GUIDE Appendix 2 Key Counter WW gt L W Expansion Memory FAX Kit Appendix 3 OPERATION GUIDE Document Processor Paper Feeder 3 000 Sheet Paper Feeder Document Finisher 3 000 Sheet Document Finisher Automatically scans originals Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying For document processor operation refer to Loading Originals in the Document Processor on page 2 32 Two additional cassettes identical to the printer s double cassettes can be installed in the printer Paper capacity and loading method are the same as Cassettes 1 and 2 NOTE Left cover 4 is located on the
315. rotocol 8 69 Send File Format 5 12 Image Quality 5 16 Original Size Selection 5 2 Print 5 30 Sending Size Selection 5 3 Setup 8 29 Store 5 30 Sending Send as E mail 3 24 Send to Folder FTP 3 27 Send to Folder SMB 3 26 Sending E mail 2 17 Sending Functions 5 1 Sending Settings 8 29 Color Type 8 30 Quick Setup Registration 8 29 Sending Size Selection 5 3 Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending 3 32 Changing Registration 3 44 8 28 8 29 8 Separator 32 Cleaning 9 4 R Setting Date and Time 2 11 RA Stateless Appendix 29 Sharpness adjust Raw Port Copy 4 30 Protocol Detail 8 67 Send 5 19 Receive Indicator 1 4 Shortcuts 3 48 Repeat Copy 4 36 Adding 3 48 Maximum Number 4 37 Sleep 2 9 Outputting 4 37 Slit Glass 1 4 Selecting 4 36 Cleaning 9 3 Replacement SMTP Appendix 30 Toner Container 9 8 SMTP E mail TX Waste Toner Box 9 8 Protocol Detail 8 66 Index 6 OPERATION GUIDE Index SNMP Protocol Detail 8 66 SNMPv3 Protocol Detail 8 66 Solving Malfunctions 10 2 Specifications Built in Finisher Appendix 26 Document Finisher Appendix 25 Document Processor Appendix 24 Job Separator Appendix 26 Machine Appendix 21 Paper Feeder Appendix 24 Printer Appendix 23 Scanner Appendix 23 Specifying Destination 3 29 3 30 Status Job Cancel 7 1 Status Page 8 39 Appendix 30 Subnet Mask Appendix 30 Supplies Checking the Remaining Amount 7 15 Switching the Language 2 10 8 2 Switching Unit of Measurement 8 11 S
316. rt 1 Only or Use Port 2 Only as the FAX Port Restriction setting Use the procedure below to select a restriction method 1 Follow steps 1 to 4 of Adding an Account on page 11 16 11 2 Press Change for the item to be restricted 3 Select the restriction mode __ Account Copy Restriction Total i Restrict use of the functions If Counter Limit is selected press or numeric keys to select the number of pages 1 9999999 Reject Usage eS EJ Cancel J fa 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Press OK 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 for other accounts to be restricted 6 Press Register The restricted account is added OPERATION GUIDE 11 19 Management Applying Limit of Restriction This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction The table below describes the action taken Item Description Immediately Job stops when the counter reaches its limit Subsequently Printing scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be rejected Alert Only Job continues while displaying an alert message i The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box Use the procedure below to apply the restriction limit Press the System Menu key Press User Login Job Accounting If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For
317. rtcut Cancel fa OK s 08 08 2009 10 10 4 34 OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions File Name Names a copy job Add other information such as date and time or job number as necessary You can check a job history or job status using the job name date and time or job number specified here Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job 1 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen 2 3 Press Advanced Setup and then File Name Entry 4 Press File Name enter the name for a copy job and press OK Ready to copy File Name Entry i Add a fie name To add date and time press Date and Time To Additional information such as Job No and Date and Time can also be set add job number Job No Added information is CD displayed in Additional Info Additional Info Job No NOTE The maximum length of the file name is Job No Date and Time Add Shortcut cancel J fe o s 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Press OK 6 Press the Start key to start copying Priority Override Suspends a current job and gives the selected job priority for copying The suspended job resumes after Priority Override copying is finished NOTE The current job that is selected as Priority Override cannot be suspended The procedure for using Priority Override is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Advanced Setup and then
318. rtcut 6 rs Paper Selection Delete after Printed Collate Offset Duplex Staple Punch Combine The following procedure is one example for replacing the registration of Density with Original Image in the Quick Setup Screen for copying 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Copy Next of Quick Setup Registration and then Change of Original Image 3 44 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation 3 Press Key 3 here as the key to set replacement location Copy Original Image ij Register Original Image function on the Quick Setup screen lor Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Cancel J a OK 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Press OK A confirmation screen appears Press Yes The Original Image Quality function will be newly registered OPERATION GUIDE 3 45 Basic Operation Program Copying and Sending By registering sets of frequently used functions as a single program you can simply press the program number as needed to recall those functions You can also name the programs for easy identification when recalling NOTE Sending operation can be registered in the program as well Up to 50 functions combining copying and sending can be registered in the program If user login administration is enabled you can only register functions by logging in with administrator privileges Registering Programs Use the procedure below to register a program The following procedure is an example of r
319. s 08 08 2009 10 10 OPERATION GUIDE Status Job Cancel Details of the Status Screens The items and keys displayed on the status screens are as follows For information on how to display the Status screen see Displaying Status Screens on page 7 2 Printing Jobs Status Screen Status Log Job Type All yi7 Job No End Date Typel Job Name 000001 10 10 09 50 doc10102008095050 000002 10 1009 55 doc10102008095510 Waiting 000003 10 10 10 00 doc10102008091000 Waiting 1 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 11 12 Pause All Cancel Priority Move Up Detail Print Jobs Override 08 08 2009 10 10 The table below lists the items displayed in the Printing Jobs Status screen Item Key Job No Acceptance No of job Accepted Time Accepted Time of job Type Icons that indicate the job type mCopy job EB Printer job eS mFAX reception Ne Wi FAX reception B E mail reception Job from Document Box ie Report List mData from Removable Memory hi Job Name Job Name or file name User Name User Name for the executed job Status Status of job InProcess The status before starting to print Printing Printing Waiting Print Waiting Pause Pausing print job or error Canceling Canceling the job OPERATION GUIDE Status Job Cancel Item Key y of Job Type Detail Sorts by specific type of job Pause All Print Jobs Pauses all the printing jo
320. s already in use an error message appears when you press Register and the number cannot be registered If you set 0000 as the address number the address is registered under the lowest available number oi Press OK The Add Group screen reappears 6 Press Change of Name 7 Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book not more than 32 characters NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 lt blue gt for details on entering characters 8 Press Member 9 Press Add 10 Select destinations contacts to add to the group NOTE Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 30 for Address List 11 Press OK If you have more destinations to add repeat Steps 9 to 11 12 Check if the selected destination was added to the group and press Register Now the group is added to the Address Book Editing a Destination Edit delete the destinations Contacts you added to the Address Book Use the procedure below to edit a destination 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Edit Destination and then Register Edit of Address Book 3 Select a destination or group to edit NOTE Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 30 for Address List 4 Press Detail The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited 8 54 OPERA
321. s and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 Thenames OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTER
322. s and types that can be used in the paper source Cassettes and the optional paper feeder Supported types Plain paper 60 to 105 g m Recycled paper 60 to 105 g m Supported paper sizes Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R Oficio Il 8 5 x 13 5 No of sheets 500 80g m Folio 8K 16K 16K R Optional 3 000 sheet paper feeder Supported types Supported paper sizes No of sheets Plain paper 60 to 105 g m Letter A4 B5 3 000 80g m Recycled paper 60 to 105 g m Multi Purpose tray MP tray Supported types Supported paper sizes No of sheets Plain paper 45 to 160 g m Recycled paper 45 to 160 g m Colored paper 45 to 160 g m Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Executive R Statement A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R B6 R A6 R Oficio II 8 5 x 13 5 8K Folio 16K 16K R Other sizes Portrait 3 7 8 to 11 5 8 or 98 to 297 mm Landscape 5 7 8 to 17 or 148 to 432 mm 200 80g m 130 120g m 100 160g m2 50 200g m2 Postcards Oufuku Hagaki return postcard Postcards 100 x 148 mm Return postcard 148 x 200 mm Postcards 80 Return postcard 80 Envelopes Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C4 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 Monarch ISO B5 Youkei 2 Youkei 4 Other sizes Portrait 3 7 8 to 11 5 8 or 98 to 297 mm Landscape 5 7 8
323. s the System Menu key Press Common Settings v and Next of Function Defaults Press v twice and Change of Repeat Copy Select the default for Off or On Press OK Collate Offset Set the defaults for Collate Offset The table below shows the available settings Item Description Collate Collate not performed Collate performed Offset not performed Each Set Offset performed If Off is selected of Collate it is Each Page performed Each Page NOTE Refer to page 3 13 for Collate Offset Use the procedure below to set the default Collate Offset settings 1 2 3 4 Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults Press v twice and Change of Collate Offset Select the defaults for Collate and Offset respectively Press OK JPEG TIFF Print Select the image size resolution when printing JPEG or TIFF file The table below shows the available settings Item Description Fit to Paper Size Fit the image size to the selected paper size Image Resolution Print at resolution of the actual image Fit to Print Resolution Fit the image size to the print resolution 8 24 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to set the default JPEG TIFF Print settings 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults Press v twice and Change
324. scribed below Remaining amount of toner You can check the remaining amount of each color toner as one of 11 levels from 100 to 0 Status of waste toner box You can check the status of waste toner box Paper You can check the size orientation type and remaining amount of paper in each paper source The remaining amount of paper is shown by 11 levels from 100 to 0 however the paper in the multi purpose tray is shown by 2 levels as 100 and 0 Others You can check the status of staples and punch waste box NOTE If the optional built in finisher document finisher or 3 000 sheet document finisher and punch unit are installed the Others section provides the status of the punch waste box and whether or not staples are available OPERATION GUIDE 7 15 Status Job Cancel Device Communication Configure the devices lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status You can also control devices depending on their status Displaying Device Communication Screen The procedure for using the Device Communication screen is explained below 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 Press Device Communication The screen to check the status or configure the devices is displayed Check of Device Status Overwriting Removable Memory Format Remove Line off Manual RX bu Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device _ Paper Supplies Communication Status 08 08 2009 10 10
325. seisshen aR 3 30 Usma Docume BOX assaccarrados ues i 3 33 e Basic Operation for Document BOK icsinesiicsticscctnxinimniansdinmstimamcasts 3 35 MSA NE O er EEEE 3 42 Cuek SeN SoS RRE 3 43 Program Copying and Sending siirsiisiiistirsirevisrkireiiiciissierko rekisis 3 46 e Registering Shortcuts Copy Send and Document Box Settings 3 46 Using ihe Intermet Browse isis accesses adcnntnsvarsesstaaeserisscmerraeraes 3 49 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Login Logout If user login administration is enabled it is necessary to enter the login user name and password to use the machine NOTE You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password In this event login with administrator privileges and change your login user name or login password Login 1 If the screen shown appears during operations Enter login user name and password press Login User Name a a x Press Keys to enter the login data using the eae focar numeric keys IC Card Login 08 08 2009 10 10 Check Counter 2 Enter the login user name and press OK NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 for details on entering characters 3 Press Login Password Press Keys to enter the login data using the numeric keys 4 Enter the password and press OK Check the login user name and password are correct and press Login NOTE If Network Authentication is se
326. ser application You can specify the following Internet browser settings e Internet Browser Setting e Browser Preferences e Proxy Settings Internet Browser Setting This selects whether or not the Internet browser is used Use the procedure below to specify the Internet browser setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press v and then Internet NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Press Change of Internet Browser 4 Press On or Off 5 Press OK Browser Preferences This specifies Internet browser preferences such as your home page setting and how pages are displayed NOTE This is not displayed if you selected Off in Internet Browser Setting page 8 58 Use the procedure below to set your Internet browser preferences 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press v and then Internet NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Press Next of Browser Environment 8 58 OPERATION GUIDE Default Sett
327. setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 Select whether or not to use Auto IP The default setting is On Use the procedure below AppleTalk Setup N oN O A A W Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting Press Change of TCP IP Press On and then press OK Press Change of IPv4 Press Auto IP Press On or Off of Auto IP and then press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 Select the Apple Talk network connection The default setting is On Use the procedure below Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then Change of AppleTalk Press On or Off 2 14 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use 4 Press OK 5 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 Installing Software Install appropriate software on your PC from the included Product Library CD ROM Product Library if you want to use the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN WIA transmission or FAX transmission
328. source for cover paper from Cassette 1 4 or Multi Purpose Tray Cover is used for Booklet see page 4 19 and Cover see page 4 21 modes NOTE Cassette 3 is displayed when either of the optional paper feeder or 3 000 sheet paper feeder is installed and Cassette 4 is displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed Use the procedure below to select the paper source for the cover 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings v and then Change of Paper Source for Cover 3 Select the paper source to load cover paper 4 Press OK Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched Preprint and Letterhead punch holes might not be aligned or the print direction might be upside down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions In such a case select Adjust Print Direction to adjust the print direction When paper orientation is not important select Speed Priority The table below lists the available settings and their details Item Description Adjust Print Direction Adjust print direction Print speed is a little slower Select this item to print on Prepunched Preprint and Letterhead Speed Priority Give the job speed top priority and disregard the paper orientation Select this item when paper orientation is not important 8 10 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu If you select Adjust Print Direction
329. starting the System Restart the CPU without turning the main power switch off Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the machine Same as the computer restart Use the procedure below to restart the system 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System and Execute of Restart NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter a login user name and password and press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 When the confirmation screen appears press Yes The system is restarted OPERATION GUIDE 8 63 Default Setting System Menu Network Setup The following network settings are available e Checking Host Name 8 64 TCP IP IPv4 Setup 8 64 e TCP IP IPv6 Setup 8 64 e Protocol Detail 8 66 e NetWare Setup 8 67 AppleTalk Setup 8 68 e WSD Scan Setup 8 68 e WSD Print Setup 8 68 e Secure Protocol 8 69 e IPSec Setting 8 71 e LAN Interface Setup 8 71 Checking Host Name Check the host name of the machine Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network Check the host name displayed under Host Name TCP IP IPv4 Setup Set up TCP IP to connect to the Windows network Refer to TCP IP IPv4 Setup by Entering IP Addresses on page 2 12 about the procedures TCP
330. stination Check before Send When performing sending jobs display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the Start key The table below shows the available settings a a a ee Off Do not display the confirmation screen of destinations On Display the confirmation screen of destinations NOTE Refer to Confirmation Screen of Destinations on page 3 29 for the Quick Setup steps Use the procedure below to set the destination check before send 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Send and then Change of Dest Check before Send 3 Select Off or On 4 Press OK Color Type Set the color type when you send color documents The table below shows the available settings Cm o a Send color documents in RGB Allows you to match the color space for machines that support sRGB Selecting RGB displays the color profile values set on the machine Use the procedure below to set the color type 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Send and then Change of Color Type 3 Select RGB or sRGB 4 Press OK 8 30 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu Entry Check for New Destination When adding new destination display the entry check screen to check the entered destination The table below shows the available settings L__ eee Off Do not display the entry check screen On Display the entry check screen Use the procedure below to set the destination chec
331. sult Report and then Change of Canceled before Sending Press Off On 4 Press OK OPERATION GUIDE 8 41 Default Setting System Menu Adjustment Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance e Copy Density Adjustment 8 42 e Send Box Density Adjust 8 42 e Print Density 8 43 e Drum Refresh 8 43 e Correcting Fine Black Lines 8 44 e System Initialization 8 44 e Display Brightness 8 44 e Silent Mode 8 45 e Charger Auto Cleaning 8 45 e Auto Color Correction 8 45 e Gray Adjustment 8 46 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Copy Density Adjustment Adjust copy density Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and manual density modes Use the procedure below to adjust the copy density 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press v Adjustment Maintenance and then Next of Copy Density Adjustment 3 Press Change of Auto or of Manual 4 Press 3 3 Lighter Darker to adjust density 5 Press OK Send Box Density Adjust Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and manual density modes Use the procedure below to adjust the density 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press v Adjustment Maintenance and then Next of Send Box Density Adjust 3 Press Change
332. t document finisher and the folding unit enables you to saddle stitch your copies fold them in two with staples in the center This is limited to the A3 B4 A4 R Ledger Legal Letter R The supported original and paper sizes are as follows Type of Original Original Size Paper Size One sided original All A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 A5 R Two sided original Ledger Legal Letter and Letter R All A3 B4 A4 R Ledger Legal and Letter R Book original A3 B4 A4 R B5 R A5 R A4 A4 R B5 B5 R Letter and Letter R Ledger Letter R and 8K A3 B4 A4 R B5 R A5 R A4 R and Letter R Ledger and Letter R ss Except for custom sized originals For binding on the left side The folded copies can be read from left to right The folded copies can be read from right to left The folded copies can be read from top to bottom Original OPERATION GUIDE 4 19 Copying Functions The procedure for using Booklet copying is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Layout Edit and then Booklet 4 Press 1 sided gt gt Booklet to produce a booklet from single sided originals Ready to copy Copies Booklet ia ica fal Press 2 sided gt gt Booklet to produce a booklet a aa from two sided originals i gt gt Booklet gt rice Press Book gt gt Booklet to produce a booklet from an open boo
333. t documents from applications NOTE To print the document from applications install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied CD ROM Product Library 1 Create a document using an application 2 Click File and select Print in the application The Print dialog box appears 3 Click the W button next to the Name field and select Painter this machine from the list ine NS O eo Status Ready I Reverse pages Type Kyocera af ie I Print as image Where I Print to file Print Range Copies and Adjustments Al j Number of copies fo C Curent page Collate C Pages from 1 to 9 IV Shrink oversized pages to paper size Print Even and Odd Pages I Expand small pages to paper size IV Auto rotate and center pages M Comments Preview K 8 264 z A d jE l Color Managed On printer Units Inches Zoom 100 0 Printing Tips Cancel 4 Enter the desired print quantity in the Number of copies box Enter any number up to 999 When there is more than one document select Collate to print out one by one in the sequence of the page numbers 5 Click Properties button The Properties dialog box appears OPERATION GUIDE 3 21 Basic Operation s Properties Basic Layout Finishing Imaging Publishing Job Advance Paper Print size ey Source Media type Destination Orientation Portrait D C Landscape Copies N Number of copies ap Collate
334. t to reject usage of the send functions FAX TX Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions Storing Restr in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes 11 10 OPERATION GUIDE Management a a rr Storing Restr in Memory Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory For Group ID specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by ActiveDirectory of Windows If you are using Windows Server 2008 check Attribute Editor tab of user properties If you are using Windows Server 2000 2003 check ADSIEdit ADSIEdit is a support tool included on the installation CD ROM for Windows Server OS under SUPPORT TOOLS Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password Lac ne 4 Press Next of User Login Setting Next of Group Register the groups that is restricted the machine usage Maximum 20 Authorization Set Reg iste r Ed it of Group List and then Add Group Name Group ID Others f Cancel le Register 08 08 2009 10 10 1 1 e 5 Press Change of Group ID Sait ea 6 Enter the gro
335. tain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 Ifyou include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgment This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN
336. ted 8 62 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu System Initialization Initialize the hard disk mounted on the machine to return to the default mode CAUTION System initialization will erase Custom Document Boxes data stored in Document Box addresses in the Address Book user property account information and settings NOTE This item will not be displayed if the optional Data Security Kit is installed Refer to the Data Security Kit E Operation Guide on the bundled CD ROM about the functions added when the Data Security Kit is installed and related procedures Using Network Print Monitor allows you to back up addresses in the Address Book 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Adjustment Maintenance and then Execute of System Initialization 3 Ifuser login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 When the confirmation screen appears press Yes Initialization starts IMPORTANT The Formatting Do not turn off the main power switch message appears during initialization Wait until initialization ends 5 Once the initialization ends the message Task is completed Turn the main power switch off and on appears Turn the main power switch off Re
337. tered the file is stored in the home directory Login User Name User name FTP server login 64 chars Login Password Password for FTP server login 64 chars S If you specify a port number other than the default 21 use the Host name port number format e g FTPhostname 140 To enter the IPv6 address enclose the address in brackets e g 3ae3 9a0 cd05 b1d2 28a 1fc0 a1 10ae 140 NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 lt blue gt for details on entering characters Press Connection Test to check the connection to the FTP server you chose If the connection fails check the entries you made 8 52 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu The Folder SMB Address Press Change of Host Name Path Login User Name and Login Password enter the information for each item and press OK The table below explains the items to be entered Description Max Moor p Characters Host Name Host name or IP address of the sending computer 64 chars Path Path to the folder used to save files e g User ScanData 128 chars Login User Name User name for folder access 64 chars For example abcdnet james smith Login Password Password for folder access 64 chars If you specify a port number other than the default 139 use the Host name port number format e g SMBhostname 140 To enter the IPv6 address enclose the address in brackets e g 3ae3
338. that is already G registered in the machine s memory pede Copy NOTE To register a form in advance refer to Form for Form Overlay Box on page 6 17 for details Follow the steps as below for form overlay 1 Press the Copy key 2 Press Layout Edit and then Form Overlay Ready to copy Copies 3 Press Scan New Form to use the first page of z3 originals as a form Form Overlay of 10 100 10 T NOTE Press or in Density to adjust the Em _ ar i density of the form Choose from ten levels in 10 E increments To use the forms already registered press Select Stored Form Press Select Form to display the document boxes that store documents which can be used as a form Select the desired form from the list and press OK Detail NOTE To return to a higher level folder press Up Preview Open i OK 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Press OK Place the originals Place the original for the form on top of the other originals When using the optional document processor the first page of the originals should be placed on the top 6 Press the Start key to start copying 4 22 OPERATION GUIDE Copying Functions Page Numbering Number multiple pages of originals in sequential order The formats for numbering are 1 P 1 or 1 n The format 1 n prints the total number of pages in the place of n S
339. then Change of Auto Panel Reset 3 Press Off or On 4 Press OK Panel Reset Timer If you select On for Auto Panel Reset set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset Options are between 5 and 495 seconds every five seconds NOTE If you select Off for Auto Panel Reset the time display does not appear Use the procedure below to set the reset time 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Date Timer and then Change of Panel Reset Timer 8 48 OPERATION GUIDE Default Setting System Menu 3 Press or to enter the time until Auto Panel Reset is turned on You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value 4 Press OK Auto Sleep If no job runs for a certain period of time automatically enter Sleep Mode Refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 9 for Sleep Sleep Timer Set the amount of time to wait before Auto Sleep Options are between 1 and 240 minutes every one minute Use the procedure below to set the Auto Sleep time 1 Press the System Menu key Press v Date Timer and then Change of Sleep Timer 2 3 Press and or the numeric keys to enter the time until Auto Sleep is turned on 4 Press OK gg Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during printing the print job stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user In the Auto Error Clear mode automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses The following errors are automati
340. ti purpose tray Set up frequently used size and media type before use The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below Item Description Auto Automatically detect paper size Select Metric or Inch for paper size Standard Available options are as follows Sizes 1 Inch models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement R 8 5 13 5 Oficio Il Executive Metric models A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R B6 R A6 R Folio Standard Select a standard size except that selected in Standard Sizes 1 Sizes 2 Inch models A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R B6 R A6 R Folio 8K 16K 16K R Metric models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement R 8 5 x13 5 Oficio II Executive 8K 16K 16K R Select special standard sizes or custom sizes ISO B5 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C4 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes Inch models H 5 83 to 17 in 0 01 increments V 3 86 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models V 98 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments H 148 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Media Type Plain 105 g m or less Transparency Rough Vellum 64 g m or less Labels Recycled Preprint Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead 2 Envelope Thick 91 g m and more High Quality
341. ting etc as desired 6 Press the Start key Printing of the selected document begins OPERATION GUIDE 6 5 Document Box Sending Documents The procedure for sending documents in a custom box is explained below ooo2 f 0404200710574511 Search Name 10 10 2008 09 50 21 MB oo03 _ 2 0404200710574521 10 10 2008 10 00 21 MB Detail Preview Vv Move Copy Delete Store File amp Cose 08 08 2009 10 10 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Custom Box select the box containing the document you want to send and press Open NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password 3 Select the document you wish to send by checking the checkbox The document is marked with a checkmark NOTE You cannot select and send multiple documents To deselect press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark 4 Press Send The screen for sending appears NOTE Depending on the settings the address book screen may appear 5 Set the destination NOTE For more information on selecting destinations refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 30 6 Press the Start key Sending of the selected document begins OPERATION GUIDE Document Box Form Overlay from Custom Boxes This function allows you to retrieve images image files overlay them into documents stored in custom boxes and then print the results Us
342. tion Document Box eS Displays the Copy screen Displays the screen for sending You can also change this to show the address book screen Switches the touch panel display to enlarged display in the Copy screen or Send screen Displays the Document Box screen Displays the Application screen Displays the Program screen 1 2 OPERATION GUIDE Part Names Blinks while data is received Blinks while the machine is accessing the hard disk fax memory or USB memory general purpose item Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped Displays the Interrupt Copy screen Ends operation logs out on the Administration screen Puts the machine into Sleep Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Lit when the machine s main power is on NN Receive YMemory Attention Interrupt Logout cDo 0 0 Lola OLO O frei Ss OOO O Olar 2 Clear Su4N l Enter Numeric keys Returns settings to Enter numbers and symbols their default states Clears entered numbers and characters Cancels or pauses the Recalls already registered destinations and printing Jonin progress programs for sending Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting Finalizes numeric key entry and finalizes screen during operations setting of functions Operates l
343. tion in the paper source other than the selected paper source The paper sizes supported in Offset are A4 B5 Letter and 16K Original Copy each set OPERATION GUIDE 3 13 Basic Operation With Document Finisher When you use offsetting printed copies are segregated after each set of copies or after each page NOTE The optional document finisher or 3 000 sheet document finisher is required Original Copy each set The procedure for using collate offset copying is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Org Paper Finishing and then Collate Offset Ready to copy 4 To use collate copying press On of Collate To use offset copying press Each Set of Offset Place original Press OK Ready to copy Copies If Off is selected for Collate press Off or Each Page of Offset Collate Offset 5 Press OK Place original Offset 8322 sa ore 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Press the Start key Copying begins 3 14 OPERATION GUIDE Basic Operation Reserve Next This function allows you to reserve the next job during printing Using this function the original will be scanned while the machine is printing When the current print job ends the reserved copy job is printed The procedure differs depending on the Reserve Next Priori
344. tion is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password Press Next of Job Accounting Setting and then Print of Print Accounting Report Press Yes on the screen to confirm the printing 11 26 OPERATION GUIDE Management Unknown Account ID Jobs The behavior of the machine when it receives a job from unknown account ID i e unsent ID can be specified Refer to Unknown login user name Job on page 11 9 for details Checking and Printing Counter Press the Counter key to check the number of sheets Printed Pages printed and scanned Black amp White 300 You can check the number of pages printed in each paper size by pressing Printed Pages by Paper Size Scanned Pages Copy FAX Originals 300 Print Printed Pages Status Page by Paper Size s 08 08 2009 10 10 Data Security Kit Operations Installing the optional Data Security Kit adds Data Security on the System Menu Refer to the Data Security Kit E OPERATION GUIDE on the bundled CD ROM for descriptions of the Data Security options and the procedures for using them OPERATION GUIDE 11 27 Management 11 28 OPERATION GUIDE Appendix Upi nal EQUpMEN ssis E Appendix 2 Character Entry Metha assess acearstanttanpcananeoec
345. tion is not stored in the address book you can send the FAX by entering the address directly viii OPERATION GUIDE Caution Warning Labels Caution Warning labels have been attached to the machine at the following locations for safety purposes Be sufficiently careful to avoid fire or electric shock when removing a paper jam or when replacing toner A High temperature inside Do not touch parts in this area because there is a danger of getting burned High temperature inside Do not touch parts in this area because there is a danger of getting burned Do not incinerate toner and toner container Dangerous sparks ma cause burn Label inside the machine Laser radiation warning Moving parts inside May cause personal injury Do not touch moving parts YEO NOTE Do not remove these labels Y High temperature inside Do no touch parts in this area because there is a danger of getting burned OPERATION GUIDE ix Installation Precautions Environment A CAUTION Avoid placing the machine on or in locations which are unstable or not level Such locations may cause the machine fall down or fall over This type of situation presents a danger of personal injury or damage S to the machine Avoid locations with humidity or dust and dirt If dust or dirt become attached to the power plug clean the plug to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock Avoid l
346. tion panel Press the Start key keys or a computer screen Regular Indicates the touch panel keys Press OK Italic Indicates a message displayed Ready to copy is displayed on the touch panel Used to emphasize a key word For more information refer to Sleep and phrase or references to Auto Sleep on page 2 9 additional information Indicates supplemental information or operations for reference Important Indicates items that are required or prohibited so as to avoid IMPORTANT problems Caution Indicates what must be observed to prevent injury or machine breakdown and how to CAUTION deal with it Description of Operation Procedure In this Operation Guide continuous operation of the keys on the touch panel is as follows Description in this Operation Guide Actual procedure Press Copy Press Copy Next of Quick v Setup v twice and then Press Next of Quick Setup Change of Original Image v Press v twice v Press Change of Original Image OPERATION GUIDE xxvii Originals and Paper Sizes This section explains the notation used in this guide when referring to sizes of originals or paper sizes As with A4 B5 and Letter which may be used either in the horizontal or vertical direction horizontal direction is indicated by an additional letter R in order to indicate the orientation of the original paper Placement direction Indi
347. to 10 documents NOTE To deselect press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark 4 Press Join OPERATION GUIDE Document Box i Confirm the order of documents to combine File Name ee ste 2008101010574501 10 10 2008 09 40 21MB bs 2008101010574511 10 10 2008 09 50 21MB 2008101010574521 10 10 2008 10 10 21MB 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Arrange the documents into the order in which they are to be joined Highlight the document you want to rearrange and press Up or Down to move it to the correct place in the sequence 6 Press Next 7 Press File Name enter the file name for the joined document and press OK NOTE Enter up to 32 characters as the file name 8 Press Join and then press Yes in the confirmation screen The documents are joined NOTE After joining the original documents are left unchanged Delete the documents if they are no longer needed 6 10 OPERATION GUIDE Document Box Deleting Documents The procedure for deleting documents in a custom box is explained below A Date and Time Ouud y ie 94042071037411 1U 1U 2ZUUS U9 3U ZL MB 0003 iE 0404200710574521 10 10 2008 10 00 21 MB search Name Detail Preview Join Move Copy ER Store File dS ed Close 08 08 2009 10 10 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Custom Box select the box containing the document you want to
348. to send via SMB Failed to send via FTP Check the network The network cable is connected The hub is not operating properly The server is not operating properly Failed to send the e mail Failed to send i FAX Check the e mail size limit of the SMTP settings on the Embedded Web Server Failed to send the e mail Failed to send i FAX Check the authentication methods of both the sender and the recipient Failed to send via FTP Check the network The network cable is connected The hub is not operating properly The server is not operating properly Failed to send the e mail Failed to send i FAX Check the SMTP user authentication method of the recipient Turn the main power switch off and back on If this error occurs several times make a note of the displayed error code and contact your service representative The scanned original exceeds the acceptable number of pages of 999 Send the excess pages separately OPERATION GUIDE 10 13 Troubleshooting Responding to Authentication Server Connection Error If an error occurs when connecting to the authentication server check the error message and follow the corresponding corrective action appears on the operation panel Corrective Actions Reference Page Symptom Set machine time to match the 2 11 server s time Cannot connect to authentication server Cannot connect to
349. to the Operation Guide of FAX kit e Press Log to display the fax transmission history For details refer to the Operation Guide of FAX kit Removing the USB Memory There is a way to remove the USB memory safely Use the procedure below to remove the USB memory 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 Press Device Communication gt Remove in Hard Disk Removable Memory Line Off Manual RX wa Log J Status 08 08 2009 10 10 Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device _ Paper Supplies Communication 3 When Device can be removed safely is displayed remove the USB memory OPERATION GUIDE 7 17 Status Job Cancel Canceling FAX Communication Cancel fax communication Use the procedure below to cancel the fax communication 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 Press Device Communication gt Line Off in FAX Port 1 or FAX Port 2 Removable Memory Format Remove amp FAX Check New FAX Paper Supplies Device Communication 08 08 2009 10 10 3 Press Yes in the confirmation screen The line is disconnected and the fax communication is canceled 7 18 OPERATION GUIDE 8 Default Setting System Menu This chapter explains how to configure various settings of the machine using the menus on the operation panel COMMON NS ia ascarasiernsasaraiasatctniceuh iiei i CODY SENI acct wee i ieee 8 26 PMN OENE Sensin k ee Document BOX SENOS ccrerrip
350. toner container and tap its top 5 6 times 5 Shake the toner container at least 10 times 9 horizontally to distribute the toner evenly 6 Insert the toner container slowly while holding its handle OPERATION GUIDE 9 9 Maintenance 7 Using both hands push in the toner container until it is locked 8 Remove the waste toner box 9 Peel the sticker off the waste toner box and remove the cap 10 Put the cap on the opening in the waste toner box and attach the sticker to the cap 9 10 OPERATION GUIDE Maintenance 11 Put the waste toner box in the supplied plastic bag for disposal and securely tie the mouth of the bag CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner A container or the waste toner box Dangerous sparks may cause burns CAUTION Do not attempt to force open or destroy the A toner container or the waste toner box 12 Install a new waste toner box 13 Remove the cleaning brush blue colored OPERATION GUIDE 9 11 Maintenance 14 Pull up and open left cover 1 15 Asshown in the figure clean dirt from the separator by moving the brush from side to side along the separator 16 As shown in the figure clean dirt from the transfer roller by moving the brush from side to side along the roller while rotating the roller by turning the gear
351. tor Appendix 8 Key Counter Appendix 8 Overview Appendix 2 Paper Feeder Appendix 4 Option Interface Slot 1 6 Optional Functions 8 75 Orientation Confirmation 8 15 Original Loading in the Document Processor 2 32 Placing on the Platen 2 30 Size xxviii Original Cover 1 4 Cleaning 9 2 Original Orientation Copy 4 10 Document Processor 4 10 Orientation Confirmation 8 15 Send 5 11 Original Placement Indicator Indications and Status 2 33 Original Size Indicator Plates 1 4 2 30 Original Size Selection Send 5 2 Original SSLeay License xxiii Originals Automatic Detection 8 9 Copy 4 2 Custom 8 4 Setup 8 4 Size Selection 4 2 5 2 Output Destination 4 12 Output Tray 8 14 P Page Numbering 4 23 Paper Appropriate Paper Appendix 14 Auto Selection 8 9 Before Loading 2 19 Cassette 8 5 Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 7 15 Custom 8 4 Default Paper Source 8 9 Loading Envelopes 2 24 Loading in the Cassettes 2 20 Loading in the Multi Purpose Tray 2 22 Multi Purpose Tray 8 6 Paper Source for Cover Paper 8 10 Setup 8 4 Size and Media 2 26 Appendix 13 Special Paper 8 10 Appendix 17 Specifications Appendix 14 Weight 8 7 Paper Feed Unit 1 5 Paper Feeder Appendix 4 Paper Jam 10 15 Cassette 1 10 16 Cassette 2 10 17 Cassettes 3 and 4 10 18 Document Finisher 10 26 Document Processor 10 25 Duplex Unit 10 20 Duplex Unit and Cassette 1 10 21 Inside the Left Covers 1 2 and 3 10 20 Jam Location Indicators 10 15 Multi Purpose Tray 10 1
352. tus Job Cancel key Printing Jobs and then Resume All Print Jobs to restart printing Documents are printed improperly Are the application software settings at the PC set properly Check that the printer driver and application software settings are set properly While the operation panel was being used the keys locked up and do not respond when pressed Is the operation panel locked Check the panel lock setting in Embedded Web Server and change the setting if necessary Embedded Web Server Operation Guide Cannot print with USB memory Was the USB memory formatted with a machine other than this machine Format the USB memory with this machine Is the USB host blocked Select Unblock in the USB host settings Check that the USB memory is securely plugged into the machine When displaying an image sent from the machine on the PC an image size is shrunk vertically or horizontally Have you selected 200x100dpi Normal or 200x400dpi Super Fine for the scan resolution Select a scan resolution other than 200x100dpi Normal or 200x400dpi Super Fine when sending an image 10 4 OPERATION GUIDE Troubleshooting Symptom USB memory not recognized Checkpoints Check that the USB memory is securely plugged into the machine Corrective Actions Page Reference Is the USB host blocked Select Unblock in the USB host settings
353. twork Authentication must be selected for the authentication method in Enabling Disabling User Login Administration on page 11 2 Select On for LDAP in Protocol Detail on page 8 66 Group Authorization Use the group authorization Use the procedure below Group List Press the System Menu key Press User Login Job Accounting If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password Press Next of User Login Setting Next of Group Authorization Set and then Change of Group Authorization Press On Press OK Register the groups that is restricted the machine usage Up to 20 groups can be individually registered Other users and groups belong to Others The table below explains the group information to be registered Item Description Group ID Enter the ID displayed on the group list between 1 and 4294967295 Group Name Enter the name displayed on the group list up to 32 characters Access Level Select Administrator or User for group access privileges Print Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer Copy Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions Send Restriction Select whether or no
354. ty refer to page 8 27 If Reserve Next Priority is set to On The Copy function default screen appears on the touch panel during printing 1 Place the originals onto the machine for reserving copy and configure the copy settings Ready to copy Shortcut 1 1 E 9 Shortcut 2 Shortcut 3 iE Auto 100 Normal 0 r 9 Shortcut 4 j z m Paper Zoom Density Original J Selection Zoom 100 epee 5 Paper 2 sided 2in1 Off pe z gt gt 2 sided Duplex Combine Staple Punch pee 6 Quick Setup Org Paper Image Quality Layout Edit Advanced Finishing Setup 08 08 2009 10 10 2 Press the Start key The machine starts scanning the originals When the current print job ends the reserved copy job is printed If Reserve Next Priority is set to Off The Copying screen appears on the touch panel during printing A Copies Copying 24 Job No 000021 Job Name Doc10102008101031 User Name The default screen for copyi ng appears Scanner Setting Printer Setting Scanned Pages Copies 2 Nm l 2 24 1 Press Reserve Next Letter Plain Letter gt 100 2 sided gt 2 sided 2 Collate gt Top Edge Top Top Tray Cancel l Reserve Next a 0 10 2 Place the originals onto the machine for reserving copy and configure the copy settings 3 Press the Start key The machine starts scanning the originals When the current print j
355. u Description Default Restarting the Setting System HTTPS Select whether or not to communicate On Y using HTTPS SSL must be set to On in SSL Setup on page 8 69 IPP Select whether or not to communicate Off Y using IPP When selecting On set the IPP default Port Number Use the IPP Port 631 default port 631 IPP over SSL Select whether or not to use IPP over Off Y SSL SSL must be set to On in SSL Setup on page 8 69 Raw Port Select whether or not to receive On Y documents using Raw Port Y The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed N The machine does not need to be restarted after the setting is changed Use the procedure below The following procedure is an example for specifying the SMTP E mail TX settings 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System and then Next of Network to display the network settings screen 3 Display the item you want to set and press Change for that item In this example press Change of SMTP E mail TX 4 Press On or Off Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 63 NetWare Setup Select the NetWare network connection After that select frame types for NetWare network from Auto Ethernet ll 802 3 802 2 or SNAP The default settings are On Frame Type Auto Use
356. u can use these keys to move the displayed area In multiple page documents MEE ou can change pages by CD entering the desired page OO number In multiple page documents you can use these buttons to change pages Zoom out Zoom in 3 When you have finished previewing documents or checking document details press Close OPERATION GUIDE 3 39 Basic Operation User Privileges When user login administration is enabled accessibility to the Document Box components will vary depending on the given user privilege Accessibilities vary depending on user privilege as follows Access level ee Accessibility Administrator Creating a box Changing box owner Operation Deleting a box Others Owner Changing box Others number Owner Renaming a box Others Owner Changing the Others password to a box Owner Overwriting the Others password to a box Owner Box information Adjusting the box Others capacity Owner Changing the owner Others Owner Changing the Others permisson Owner Changing the Others period of using a box Owner Restricting the Accessibility to a Box The accessibility to a Custom Box differs depending on the level of privileges as follows Administrator An administrator can gain access and manipulate all boxes User A user can gain access and manipulate his her own boxes a
357. umbnails The list can be used as shown below List Listing the documents by Listing the documents by time of update Listing the documents by size in 3 name in alphabetical order in ascending descending order ascending descending order Selecting more than one ei document at a time i EE D ein File Name yi Date and Time DE OG c s Highlighting a document to p display its details with Detail Selecting documents by e 2 0404200710574511 10 10 2008 09 50 21 MB checking checkboxes A 0003 Wf E 0404200710574521 10 10 2008 10 00 21 MB d Print Send Detail d Preview pen Previews the selected Join Move Copy Delete J Store File docu me nt Close Status 08 08 2009 10 10 Thumbnail Switches between list display Selecting more than one l and thumbnail display document at a time i Prints sends joins moves Highlighting a document a a HHEH pees or deletes the to display its details with selected documents Detail Selecting documents by checking checkboxes L Saves the document in f o ce the open box 08 08 2009 10 10 NOTE You can select multiple documents by pressing the respective document checkboxes However note that you cannot select multiple documents when you are sending documents OPERATION GUIDE 3 37 Basic Operation Viewing Editing Box Details You can check and modify box
358. up ID and press OK ee Lh 7 Press Change of Group Name l 8 Enter the group name and press OK Spena gt E a NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 10 for details on entering characters Cancel le Register 08 08 2009 10 10 9 Press Change of Access Level 10 Select the user access privilege and press OK 11 Press Change of Print Restriction 12 Select Reject Usage or Off and press OK OPERATION GUIDE 11 11 Management 13 Follow steps 11 and 12 above to set Copy Restriction Send Restriction FAX TX Restriction Storing Restr in Box and Storing Restr in Memory 14 Press Register to add a new group on the group list Obtain Network User Property Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server NOTE To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server Network Authentication must be selected for the authentication method in Enabling Disabling User Login Administration on page 11 2 The table below explains the required information to be registered Use the procedure below Item Description Server Name Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address up to 64 characters Port Set the LDAP port number or use the default port 389 Name 1 2 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the LDAP server up to 32 characters Name 2 3 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the
359. up to 200 sheets of plain paper 80 g m The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A3 to A6 and Hagaki and from Ledger to Statement R 8K 16K and 16K R Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper IMPORTANT When using media types other than plain paper such as recycled or colored paper always specify the media type setting Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 28 If you are using a paper weight of 106 g m or more set the media type to Thick The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows e Hagaki 80 sheets OHP film 25 sheets Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Monarch Youkei 4 Youkei 2 20 sheets NOTE When you load custom size paper enter the paper size by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 28 When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper select the media type by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 28 2 22 OPERATION GUIDE Preparation before Use 1 Open the multi purpose tray PREP Al UZ SO E gt WAZ 2 Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the paper 3 Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops IMPORTANT Keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up Curled pap
360. user name to be displayed from the LDAP server up to 32 characters E mail Address 4 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e mail address from the LDAP server up to 32 characters Search Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds from 5 to 255 seconds LDAP Security Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server 1 If using Active Directory of Windows the server name may be same as the server name entered in the network authentication 2 If using Active Directory of Windows displayName of Attribute may be used as Name 1 3 Name 2 can be left out When you assign displayName in Name 7 and department in Name 2 and if the value of displayName is Mike Smith and the value of department is Sales in Active Directory of Windows the user name appears as Mike Smith Sales 4 If using Active Directory of Windows mail of Attribute may be used as E mail Address 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator 11 12 OPERATION GUIDE Management User Login Job Accounting Network User Property i Get the network user information LDAP Server Information Off Server Name ey Acquisition of User Informatio
361. ution FAX TX Resolution Density 2 sided Book Original File Format Zoom Scan Resolution FAX TX Resolution Density 2 sided Book Original File Format Original Size Sending Size Original Orientation Original Image Color Selection Continuous Scan OPERATION GUIDE 3 43 Basic Operation Function Document Document Box Storage Default Registration Color Selection Resolution Density 2 sided Book Original Original Orientation Original Image Functions Available for Registration Color Selection Resolution Density 2 sided Book Original Original Orientation Original Image Original Size Zoom Continuous Scan Storing Size Sending From Box File Format Delete after Transmitted FAX TX Resolution Sending Size File Format Delete after Transmitted FAX TX Resolution Sending Size Printing From Box Changing Registration Ready to copy NS lt E Place original Auto 100 Normal 0 ae ae Paper Zoom Density Original fal Selection 2 sided 2in1 off gt gt 2 sided fal Duplex ge 4 Staple Punch Org Paper Image Quality Layout Edit Advanced Finishing Setup 08 08 2009 10 10 Quick Setup Paper Selection Delete after Printed Collate Offset Duplex Staple Punch Combine Shortcut 1 E Shortcut 2 E Shortcut 3 a Shortcut 4 Shortcut 5 Ee Sho
362. vailable Original Orientation Original Orientation Left Top Edge Left top Left Top Edge Left top corner corner Original Orientation Original Orientation Top Edge Back Edge Top Edge Back Edge A v 3 000 Sheet Document Finisher Cassette Paper Load Direction llli f gt ll MMi fl MMi ll i Y II 3 000 Sheet Document Z __ Zr Finisher A A 7 7 a A 7 7 Cassette Paper Load A E Direction pm p pae lt a Document Finisher Zra 2 g Cassette Paper Load A A N A A L Direction A A A A A A A I A A Document Finisher K A gt N A Cassette Paper Load a A Direction S A A A i A _ OPERATION GUIDE 3 17 Basic Operation Original Orientation Top Edge Back Edge Top Edge Back Edge
363. verwrite Setting Specifies whether or not old stored documents are overwritten when new documents are stored To overwrite old documents press Permit To retain old documents press Prohibit Delete after Printed Automatically delete document from the box once printing is complete To delete the document press On To retain the document press Off NOTE If user login administration is enabled Owner and Permission are also displayed Refer to Creating new Custom Boxes when user login administration is enabled on page 3 41 5 Check the details you have entered and then press Register The Custom Box is created Setting the document deletion time Sets the time when documents stored in a custom box are deleted The procedure for using Auto File Deletion Time is explained below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Document Box Removable Memory Next of Custom Box Next of Default Setting and then Change of Auto File Deletion Time OPERATION GUIDE 6 3 Document Box SS 3 Set the time at which the document is deleted by Set the time to automatically delete stored documents pressing Press Keys to enter the time z directly using the numeric keys 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Press OK The time for document deletion is set Storing Documents The procedure for storing documents in a custom box is explained below 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Place the originals in the
364. w to set the number of stored jobs 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Document Box Removable Memory Next of Job Box then Change of Quick Copy Job Retention OPERATION GUIDE 6 13 Document Box Document Box Removable Memory Quick Copy Job Retention 3 Press or to enter the maximum number of i Set the maximum number of quick copy proof print jobs to retain sto red jobs You can e nte ra ny num be r betwee n 0 Use or the numeric keys to enter a number Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs a nd 50 You can also enter the number using the numeric keys 0 50 32 job s BEI NOTE If you enter a value of 0 zero you cannot use the Repeat Copy function Cancel al OK 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Press OK The maximum number of stored jobs is set Printing a Document You can print documents stored in the Quick Copy Proof and Hold box Use the procedure below to print a document 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Job Box 3 Select Quick Copy Proof and Hold and press Open 4 Select the creator of the document and press Open 5 Select the document to print and press Print LJ File 10 10 2008 09 45 CJ File 10 10 2008 09 50 CJ 9 4File 10 10 2008 09 55 5File 10 10 2008 10 00 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the number of prints as desired 7 Press Start Print to start printing 6 14 OPERATION GUIDE
365. wer Cable 2 6 Border Erase USB Cable 2 6 Copy 4 17 Connection Method 2 3 Send 5 23 Continuous Scan Bundled Items 2 2 Copy 4 31 Buzzer 8 3 OPERATION GUIDE Index 1 Index Send 5 22 Conventions in This Guide xxvii Copy Appendix 9 Adjusting Density 3 7 Collate Copying 3 13 Duplex Copying 3 11 Offset Copying 3 13 Originals 4 2 Selecting Image Quality 3 8 Setup 8 26 Zoom Copying 3 9 Copy Settings 8 26 Auto Priority 8 27 Auto Paper Selection 8 26 Border Erase for Back Page 8 26 Paper Selection 8 26 Preset Limit 8 27 Quick Setup Registration 8 28 Reserve Next Priority 8 27 Copying Functions 4 1 Counting the Number of Pages Printed by Paper Size 11 25 Counter 11 27 Each Job 11 24 Printing a Report 11 26 Total Job 11 23 Unknown Account ID Jobs 11 27 Counting the Number of Pages Printed 11 23 Cover Mode 4 21 Custom Box Creating a New Box 6 2 Deleting Documents 6 11 Editing Documents 6 8 Form Overlay 6 7 Join Documents 6 9 Move Documents 6 8 Printing Documents 6 5 Sending Documents 6 6 Storing Documents 6 4 User Privileges 3 40 D Date Timer 8 47 Auto Error Clear 8 49 Auto Panel Reset 8 48 Auto Sleep 8 49 Date Format 8 47 Date Time 8 47 Setup 8 47 Time Zone 8 48 Default 8 15 Auto Image Rotation 8 21 Border Erase 8 20 Border Erase to Back Page 8 20 Collate Offset 8 21 Color Selection Send Store 8 17 Color TIFF Compression Settings 8 23 Continuous Scan 8 16 Density 8 18 EcoPrint 8 22 E mail Subject Body 8 19 Fi
366. with transmission speed and security issues At the same time as you send a scanned image you can also print the image or send it to the Document Box To use the Scanning Function perform the following steps e Program the settings including the E mail setting on the machine e Use Embedded Web Server the internal HTML web page to register the IP address the host name of the SMTP server and the recipient e Register the destination in the Address Book or One Touch keys e When the PC Folder SMB FTP is selected it is necessary to share the destination folder For setting up the PC Folder contact your administrator e Creating Registering a Document Box when a Document Box is selected as the destination e Detailed transmission settings to select a Document Box as the destination or to print and send the image at the same time Follow the steps below for basic sending The following four options are available e Send as E mail Sends a scanned original image as an E mail attachment page 3 24 e Send to Folder SMB Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC page 3 25 e Send to Folder FTP Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server page 3 25 e Send to Document Box Sends a document stored in a document box on this machine page 6 6 Image Data Scanning with TWAIN WIA Loads the document data stored in a Custom Box to a PC Refer to the TWAIN WIA Driver Operation Guide NOTE D
367. x Removable Memory Next of Job Box then Change of Deletion of Job Retention 3 Select the time for automatic deletion To deactivate automatic deletion press Off 4 Press OK NOTE This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set Regardless of this function setting temporary documents are deleted when the main power switch is turned off Form for Form Overlay Box Storing a Form You can store forms to be used for the form overlay in the Form for Form Overlay box You can store a 1 page form Use the procedure below to store a form 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Place the original in the document processor or on the platen 3 Press Job Box OPERATION GUIDE 6 17 Document Box 4 Select Form for Form Overlay and press Open Private Print Stored Job B Quick Copy Proof and Hold B Repeat Copy E Form for Form Overlay Job Box 08 08 2009 10 10 Form for Form Overlay 5 Press Store File nome OOOO O ioeie O ese m 1010200809530900 10 10 2008 09 00 21 MB 1010200800530910 10 10 2008 09 10 1010200800530920 10 10 2008 09 20 Status 08 08 2009 10 10 6 If necessary select the image quality of original scanning density etc before the original is scanned 7 Press the Start key The original is scanned and stored in the Form for Form Overlay box NOTE For information on using image overlays with a stored form see For
368. ying Functions Output Destination You can use the procedure below to select an output destination such as the optional document finisher for your copies NOTE Optional output destinations include the job separator built in finisher document finisher 3 000 sheet document finisher and mailbox The table below shows the available output destinations Destination Description Top tray Top tray of the machine where copies are stored Finisher Tray Tray of the optional built in finisher or document finisher Tray A Tray B Tray C Trays A to C in the optional 3 000 sheet document finisher Job Separator Tray Optional job separator Tray 1 to 7 Trays 1 to 7 in the optional mailbox tray 1 is the top tray Copy output orientation can be selected either as face up print facing up or face down print facing down NOTE To change default destination for copies refer to Paper Output on page 8 14 for details Use the procedure below to select the output destination 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Org Paper Finishing and then Paper Output Ready to copy 4 Select the output destination for finished copies Paper Output When you select Finisher Tray Tray B Tray C or Tray 1 to Tray 7 select the orientation of output copy Face Up print facing up or Face Down print facing down Face Down Top Tray Tray C Tray A Job Separator Tr
369. ymbols i System Initialization 8 63 System Menu 8 1 T TCP IP Appendix 30 TCP IP IPv4 Setup 2 12 TCP IP IPv6 Appendix 28 Setup 8 64 Toner Container Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 7 15 Replacement 9 8 Trade Names xxi Transfer Roller Cleaning 9 6 TWAIN Appendix 30 U USB Appendix 30 USB Cable Connecting 2 6 USB Interface 1 6 2 4 USB Memory Printing Documents 6 20 Removing 6 21 Saving Documents 6 22 User Login Administration 11 2 Adding 11 5 Changing Properties 11 7 Enabling Disabling 11 2 Group Authorization Settings 11 10 Login 11 3 Logout 11 4 Unknown login user name Job 11 9 W Waste Toner Box 1 5 Replacement 9 8 Status 7 15 WIA Appendix 31 WSD Print Setup 8 68 WSD Scan 5 27 Setup 8 68 X XPS File formats 5 12 8 17 Printing documents stored in Removable USB Memory 6 20 Saving documents to Removable USB Me mory 6 22 Z Zoom Copying Auto Zoom 3 9 Manual Zoom 3 9 Preset Zoom 3 9 XY Zoom 3 10 Zoom Mode Copy 5 5 Send 5 5 OPERATION GUIDE Index 7 Index Index 8 OPERATION GUIDE DIRECTIVE 2002 96 CE ON THE TREATMENT COLLECTION RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OF ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND THEIR COMPONENTS INFORMATION 1 FOR COUNTRIES IN THE EUROPEAN UNION EU The disposal of electric and electronic devices as solid urban waste is strictly prohibited it must be collected separately The dumping of these devices at unequipped and unauthorized places may have hazardous effects on hea
370. you attempt to store documents in excess of the above maximum the oldest document data will be overwritten by the latest document data The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple print job and holds printing of the remaining copies Printing a multiple print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while maintaining the document data in the Job Box To continue to print the remaining copies use the operation panel You can change the number of copies to print Repeat Copy Box page 6 15 Repeat Copy feature stores the copied original document data in the Job Box and allows you to print additional copies later By default up to 32 documents can be stored When power is turned off the original data will be deleted NOTE Repeat Copy function is not available when the optional Data Security Kit is installed Form for Form Overlay Box page 6 17 Image Overlay feature copies the original document overlaid with a form or image This Job Box is used to store the forms or images for overlaying Removable Memory Box A USB memory inserted into the USB memory slot A1 of the machine is also recognizable as a Job Box This allows printing of the PDF data stored in the USB memory You can print PDF data directly from the USB memory without a PC Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB memory in the PDF TIFF JPEG XPS or high c
371. you try to change the date time when a trial application page 8 75 is running the If you change Date Time setting trial functions will be unavailable Are you sure message is displayed To change the date time press Yes Date Format Select the display format of year month and date The year is displayed in Western notation Use the procedure below to select the date format 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Date Timer and then Change of Date Format 3 Select MM DD YYYY DD MM YYYY or YYYY MM DD and press OK OPERATION GUIDE 8 47 Default Setting System Menu Time Zone Set the time difference in the location you are from GMT Use the procedure below to set the time difference 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Date Timer and then Change of Time Zone 3 Select the location NOTE Press A or v to select the location 4 Press Off or On of Summer Time and press OK NOTE If you select a region that does not utilize summer time the summer time setting screen will not appear Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time automatically reset settings and return to the default setting NOTE Refer to page 8 15 for the default settings Auto Panel Reset ON OFF Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not Use the procedure below to specify the auto panel reset setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Date Timer and
372. ze Also you use a media type other than plain paper specify the media type setting Selection Item Selectable Size Type Paper size is automatically detected and selected Select whether the paper is in Metric size or in Inch size Standard Select from the standard sizes Selectable paper Sizes 1 sizes are as follows Inch size Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R 8 5 13 5 and Oficio II Metric size A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R and Folio Standard Select from the standard sizes not included in Sizes 2 Standard Sizes 1 Selectable paper sizes are as follows Inch size A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R Folio 8K 16K R and 16K Metric size Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il 8K 16K R and 16K Media Type Plain 105 g m or less Rough Vellum 64 g m or less Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead High Quality and Custom 1 8 i To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Paper Weight on page 8 7 When the paper weight settings shown below are selected the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected e Custom 1 to 8 Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Heavy 3 or Extra Heavy i To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 8 10 NOTE If the optional FAX kit is installed the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below Plain Recycled Bond Colo

operation guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents